JP7144695B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

It relates to a pachinko game machine.

Pachinko machines, which are currently the most popular, are called "special symbols" (or main game symbols) on the display part such as 7 segments when a game ball enters the start chucker. When the symbol is displayed variably, and the special symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, "7"), a special game state in which the player is more profitable than in the normal game state {large winning port that is normally closed It is a type of machine (so-called "first-class pachinko game machine") that shifts to a game in which a player (so-called attacker) releases the game under a predetermined condition. Here, in order to reduce the burden of controlling the display of special symbols, which are directly linked to the player's profits, in addition to the above-mentioned "special symbols", "decorative symbols" are used to enhance the interest of the game. The pattern to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a manner synchronized with the variation of the special pattern. Then, when the special pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern also starts to fluctuate accordingly, and when the special pattern stops in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative pattern also follows in a predetermined mode (for example, "777"). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed by stopping the decorative symbols in a predetermined manner.

Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko game machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, it is necessary to devise how to make the overall performance including the fluctuation mode of the pattern as highly interesting as possible. The focus is on whether or not to give.

JP 2013-236670 A

For example, there has been a production that instructs the player to change the strength of the shot (so-called right-handed production, left-handed production, etc.) according to the progress of the game, but the production should be easy for the player to understand. Therefore, there is a problem that further improvement is required.

The pachinko game machine according to this aspect is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, the main game start opening (for example, , second main game start gate B10),
A variable member (e.g., second main game starter electric accessory B11d) attached to the main game starter (e.g., second main game starter B10) and displaceable between an open state and a closed state,
When displaced to the open state, the game ball can be entered into the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than in the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the main game start A variable member (for example, a second main game starter electric accessory B11d) configured to make it more difficult for a game ball to enter the mouth (for example, the second main game starter B10) or compared to the open state. When,
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an auxiliary game start opening (for example, , Auxiliary game start port H10) and
a main game identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying main game identification information;
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
Auxiliary game section (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
a main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the entry of a ball into a main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10);
When the main game random number is obtained by the main game random number obtaining means, the obtained main game random number is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the main game is suspended. main game random number temporary storage means;
When the change display start condition of the main game identification information related to a certain main game suspension is satisfied, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol Main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the main game identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g);
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player and a sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for information display to be executed to the side of the sub-game part (for example, the sub-control board S);
Auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into an auxiliary game start opening (for example, an auxiliary game start opening H10);
When the auxiliary game random number is obtained by the auxiliary game random number obtaining means, the auxiliary game random number obtained is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the auxiliary identification information is satisfied, and the auxiliary game is suspended. game random number temporary storage means;
When the condition for starting the variable display of the auxiliary game identification information related to a certain auxiliary game reservation is satisfied, the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the auxiliary game identification information after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, within a displacement drive period, which is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) can be displaced, After displacing the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state, an easy-to-enter ball game is executed in which the action of displacing the variable member to the closed state is performed one or more times. and an easy-to-enter ball game determination execution means,
The main game department
When a predetermined special game is executed in the special game control means, a specific game control means for executing a specific game (for example, a time shortening game state) in which an easy-to-enter game is likely to be executed after the special game is finished.
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
an information display content control means for controlling the information display content to be displayed by the information display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information reception means;
A notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As the display mode of the notification image, it has at least a first mode and a second mode that is a display mode different from the first mode,
When the notification image is to be displayed, it is configured to be able to determine whether the notification image is to be displayed in the first mode or the second mode, based on whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
As one of the predetermined conditions, when the auxiliary game unit satisfies a predetermined notification switching condition under the condition that the specific game is executed, storing change information for changing the display mode of the notification image,
Having a specific condition when it is time to change the display mode of the notification image under the circumstances where the change information is stored,
If an event occurs in which the predetermined notification switching condition is not satisfied before the change timing for changing the display mode of the notification image occurs, the display mode of the notification image is changed at the change timing for changing the display mode of the notification image. remain unchanged.

According to the pachinko game machine according to this aspect, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand when executing the effect of instructing the player to determine the strength of the firing intensity.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an electrical overall configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flow chart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game is finished on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flow chart of initial processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of pending information management processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the first suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the second suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flow chart of decoration symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of initial processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the first suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the second suggestion effect execution control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the firing instruction display unit control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a configuration diagram of the main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a configuration diagram of the main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flow chart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flow chart of limited frequency B variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is an example of the content of the launch instruction command on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game ends on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of a special during-game effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of right-handed image display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of left-handed image display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a configuration diagram of the main game table on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of game assistance effect display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of special game in-progress notification image display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of a special game in-progress notification image display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of standby demonstration display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a standby demonstration image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flow chart of notification image confirmation processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flow chart of right-handed image display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of left-handed image display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flow chart of right-handed warning display control processing on the side of the sub-main control unit in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of left-handed warning display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of standby demonstration display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a standby demonstration image diagram 2 in the pachinko game machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a main flow chart on the sub-main control section side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of movable body role product drive control processing on the side of the sub-main control section in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 84 is an example of a notification image instruction command in the pachinko game machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 85 is an image diagram of a character object avoidance notification image in a pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a notification image image diagram in the pachinko game machine according to this example.

form for implementation

First, the meaning of each term used in this specification will be explained. "Entering ball" includes not only prize winning in which a prize ball is paid out, but also passing through a "through chucker" in which prize balls are not paid out. "Identification information" may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, such as numbers, letters, and patterns. and the like. In addition, in this specification, "identification information" may be referred to as main game design/special design (special design) or decoration design (design), but "special design (special design)" is the main control board The "decorative design (design)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. The term “identification information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method, and includes, for example, light emission from light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only the presence or absence of light emission but also the difference in color), physical typical display (for example, a pattern drawn on the reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Production” refers to display content that enhances the interest of the game, such as identification information change / stop, notice, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photographs, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. "Open state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy winning state, closed state = non-winning state. Easy state. Also, for example, a state of protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (on the side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as a retracted state) ) (so-called tongue-type attacker), advance state=easy-win state, retreat state=non-easy-win state. “Random numbers” are random numbers used in lotteries (computer-based lotteries) to determine game content in pachinko machines, and include pseudo-random numbers in addition to strictly-defined random numbers (for example, random numbers are hard soft random numbers as random numbers, pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called "basic random number" that affects the result of the game, specifically, the "random number (random number for lottery)" related to the transition to the special game, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification pattern are determined. ``variation mode determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, ``symbol determination random number'' for determining the stop pattern, and ``hit pattern determination random number'' for determining whether to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the content of the variation mode, the content of the definite identification information, etc., but at least one random number that is the same or different from each other may be used. In this specification, the number of random numbers may be expressed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is called one (that is, in the above example, a bunch of random numbers such as winning random number + variation mode determination random number + symbol determination random number ... is called one random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, winning random number) may serve as another type of random number (for example, symbol determination random number). "Game state" means, for example, a special game state in which a large winning hole can be opened, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-probability variable game state in which the lottery probability of transition to the special game state is a predetermined value. Probability fluctuation game state with high lottery probability, shift to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning a prize to the starting port that triggers the lottery (so-called normal pattern time saving state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In some cases, it is an arbitrary combination of one or more of the following: long open period of variable members, high winning probability of open variable members, short notification time of lottery results for open variable members, and the like. "Expected average execution time of easy-to-enter game per unit time" is assumed to be a situation where auxiliary game patterns are constantly changing (for example, a situation where there is always a hold related to auxiliary game patterns) In the case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the start port. , If the variable member is attached to the starting port, the length of the opening period of the variable member (so-called open extension function operating state / non-operating state), the normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of the variable member Probability high and low (so-called normal pattern high probability state / low probability state), variation time length of normal pattern (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers the opening of variable members (so-called normal pattern fluctuation reduction function non-operating state / operating state), etc. is realized by any one or a plurality of combinations.

The following embodiment is a model (first class first class compound machine) in which two conventional first class pachinko game machines are mixed. However, it is not limited to this in any way, and it is within the scope even if it is applied to other game machines (for example, conventional type 1, type 2, type 3, pachinko game machines such as general electric players) . Note that this embodiment is only an example, and regarding the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of turning on and off the flag, the name of the means responsible for the processing of each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. Moreover, the above-described embodiments and modifications should not be construed as being limited to being applied to a specific one, and may be combined in any way. For example, a modification of one embodiment should be understood as a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification is described independently of another, the It should be understood that combinations of modifications and other such modifications are also described. Further, in this embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are also not limiting, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modified examples {for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each game state, etc.} This is just an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, conditions between the first main game side and the second main game side, conditions between probability fluctuation games and non-probability fluctuation games, time reduction games and non- It is understood that the magnitude relationships and combinations of numerical values shown in the section "By conditions with time-shortened games, etc." Should. For example, between the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side, the probability of winning at the time of lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game have a magnitude relationship between the 1st main game side = 2nd main game side. Even if it is exemplified as such, the magnitude relationship can be changed as appropriate such as the first main game side < the second main game side, or the first main game side > the second main game side. Good (same for other numerical values and conditions). Also, for example, when the number of continuations of the probability variable gaming state is configured based on the purpose of continuing until the next big hit occurs, is the number of continuations set to "65535" (configured to continue substantially)? Alternatively, even in the option of the implementation method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variable game state until the next big win occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modifications. should be understood to be subject to change as appropriate. It should be noted that the time-reduction gaming state according to this example may be that the main game time-reduction flag is on, the auxiliary game time-reduction flag may be on, the main game time-reduction flag and It may indicate a state in which the auxiliary game time saving flag is on. The time reduction game state including the state where the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on may indicate that the opening time extension function is operating. It should be noted that the time-reduced game state may be referred to as a specific game state, and the non-time-reduced game state may be referred to as a normal game state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Each element will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

First, referring to FIG. 1, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment will be described. A pachinko machine mainly consists of a machine frame and a game board. These will be described in order below.

First, the game machine frame of the pachinko game machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball tray D20, a lower ball tray D22 and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko game machine to a position to be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame that matches the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for shooting game balls, a mechanism for detachably housing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting game balls, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so that it can be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, delivering game balls to the launch rail, extracting game balls to the lower ball tray D22, and the like. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. A speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22 to output sound effects according to the game state and the like.

Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as game nails and windmills (not shown) and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, 1st big winning slot C10, 2nd big winning slot C20 (or sometimes called distribution winning slot C20), 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, An auxiliary game symbol display device H20, a center decoration D38 and an out port D36 are installed. Each element will be described in detail below.

Next, the first main game starting port A10 is installed as a starting prize winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start opening detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information.

Next, the second main game starting port B10 is installed as a starting prize winning port corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start opening B10 includes a second main game start opening ball detection device B11s and a second main game start electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball to the second main game start opening B10, and the second main game start indicating the entry at the time of entry. Generate entry ball information. Next, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d changes between a closed state in which game balls are less likely to enter the second main game starter B10 and an open state in which game balls are easier to enter than in the normal state.

Here, in this embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided separately, and the game flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) A ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start port A10 and difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10 by a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown). On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) are not easily guided to the first main game start opening A10 by a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), It is configured to be easily guided to the game start port B10. It should be noted that "easily guided" and "difficult to be guided" are determined, for example, by the number of incoming balls when 10,000 game balls are shot to the right and left respectively.

In this embodiment, the electric accessory is provided on the side of the second main game start port B10, but it is not limited to this, and the electric accessory is provided on the side of the first main game start port A10. may Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter B10 are arranged apart from each other, but it is not limited to this, and the first main game starter A10 and the second main game starter A10 are arranged separately. The two main game start ports B10 are arranged so as to overlap vertically, or the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port A10 and the second main game start port are arranged in one unit having a common entrance and a sorting mechanism inside. B10 may be arranged side by side. In addition to the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10, it is also possible to separately provide a third main game start port corresponding to either the first main game or the second main game. be.

Next, the auxiliary game starting port H10 is provided with an auxiliary game starting port entering ball detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start entrance ball detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start hole H10, and generates auxiliary game start entrance ball information indicating the entrance ball at the time of entrance. do. The entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game starter H10 triggers a lottery for expanding the second main game starter electric accessory B11d of the second main game starter B10. It should be noted that in this embodiment, the auxiliary game symbols are released by stopping at the hit symbol (in this embodiment, since it is provided at the second main game start port B10, the second main game start The electric accessory B11d) is provided at the second main game start opening, but it may be provided at the first main game start opening and the third main game start opening (the In this case, the electric accessory may be referred to as the first main game starter electric accessory or the third main game starter electric accessory).

Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is difficult to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) ) is configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game starting port H10 {However, it is not limited to this, and for the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 Also, it may be configured so that it is easy to be guided to the left side auxiliary game start opening separately provided in addition to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

Next, above the out port D36 (particularly, on the right side of the game area D30), there are provided a first large prize winning port C10 and a second large prize winning port C20. The game ball flowing down the standard) is configured to easily pass through the area where the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20 are arranged before reaching the out hole D36.

Next, the first big winning hole C10 is a horizontally rectangular out hole that opens when the first main game pattern (special pattern) or the second main game pattern (special pattern) stops as a jackpot pattern. This is a prize winning opening corresponding to the main game located above D36 (especially on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the first large winning opening C10 includes a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a first large winning opening electric accessory C11d (and a first large winning opening and a solenoid C13). Here, the first big winning hole winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole C10, and the first big winning hole entering ball information indicating the ball entering the first big winning hole C10. to generate The first big winning opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 between a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the first big winning opening C10 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins (the first 1. Excite the big winning opening solenoid C13 to make it variable). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to In this case, for example, an advanced state in which the plate-shaped member provided in the big prize opening protrudes in a direction blocking the opening of the big prize opening, and a retracted state in which the plate member is retracted toward the opposite side. mode (so-called sliding attacker, the large winning opening itself has a box-shaped member that can accept game balls that protrude from the game area D30 and flow down the game area D30, and if it is in the advanced state The large winning opening is closed by obstructing the reception of game balls into the box-shaped member, and in the retracted state, the reception of game balls into the box-shaped member is permitted, resulting in a large winning opening. A configuration in which the winning opening is in an open state) may be used, which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Next, the second big winning hole C20 is a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game pattern (special pattern) or the second main game pattern (special pattern) stops with a big win pattern, and is out. This is a prize winning opening corresponding to the main game located above the opening D36 (especially on the right side of the game area D30). As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20 includes a second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, a second large winning opening electric accessory C21d (and a second large winning opening It has an opening solenoid C23), a specific area C22, and a specific area entrance detection device C22s. Here, the second large winning opening detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening entry ball information indicating the entry of the ball at the time of entry. to generate Further, the specific area ball entry detection device C22s is a sensor that detects the game ball entering the specific area C22, and generates specific area ball entry information indicating the ball entry at the time of the ball entry. A game ball entering the second big winning hole C20 is configured to be detected by either the second big winning hole winning detection device C21s or the specific area ball entering detection device C22s. Next, the second big winning hole electric accessory C21d changes the second big winning hole C20 into a normal state in which the game ball cannot or is difficult to win in the second big winning hole C20 and an open state in which the game ball easily wins. Make it variable (make it variable by energizing the second big winning opening solenoid C23). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is changed between a normal state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to win a horizontal rectangular shape and an open state in which a game ball can easily win a prize. is not limited to, and the slide type attacker described above may be used. In addition, although not particularly illustrated in this example, a valve-shaped valve that displaces between a first position where the game ball is easy to enter the specific area C22 and a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area C22. A shielding member may be provided (in this case, the opening/closing mode of the shielding member may be changed according to the jackpot pattern).

Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is associated with the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game). It is a device that executes display, etc. As a specific configuration, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) and a first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g). A symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is provided. Here, the first main game symbol reservation display portion A21h (second main game symbol reservation display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is equal to the first main game (second main game). It corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations in the main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion B21g) is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is "0" to "9". ” and ``-'' for failure {However, it is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED is displayed so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game pattern is displayed. It is preferable to display by a symbol or the like using In addition, the display of the number of holds is not limited to being composed of four lamps, and is configured to be able to display the number of holds for up to four (for example, it is composed of one lamp, number 1: lighting, number of holds 2: flashing at low speed, number of holds 3: flashing at medium speed, number of holds 4: flashing at high speed}.

It should be noted that the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have a role in production, so in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is used. is set to an inconspicuous size. However, in the case of adopting a method in which the first main game pattern (second main game pattern) itself has a role in production and the first decorative pattern (second decorative pattern) is not displayed, the production described later The first main game symbols (second main game symbols) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes the display of effect images including decorative symbols that fluctuate and stop interlocking with the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which effects including variable display of decorative symbols are executed. Here, the display area SG10 consists of a first pending display portion SG12 (and a second pending display portion SG13) for displaying main game pending information, and a moving image of a plurality of columns of decoration symbol variations imitating a slot machine game, for example. and a decorative design display area SG11 for displaying . In this embodiment, the effect display device SG is composed of a liquid crystal display, but may be composed of other display means such as mechanical drums or LEDs. Next, the first suspension display portion SG12 (and the second suspension display portion SG13) is composed of four graphic image displays, and the suspension display by the graphic images is interlocked with the suspension lamp of the main game symbol.

Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding auxiliary game symbols. Specifically, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol reserve display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol reservation display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lights of the lamps corresponds to the number of reservations on the auxiliary game side. In addition, although not shown, it is possible to display on the effect display device SG the display regarding the auxiliary game symbols and the display regarding the suspension of the auxiliary game symbols.

Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the performance display device SG, and has functions such as the passage of game balls, the protection of the performance display device SG, decoration, and the like. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in the game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko game machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine, and controls the overall game operation (i.e., the game main control board M that performs control directly related to the interests of players), and effect control means (sub-main control unit, sub-main control unit, SM, a sub-sub control unit (also called a sub-sub board) SS that mainly executes performance display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and winning to each prize opening A prize ball payout device (set base) KE equipped with a payout unit KE10 for paying out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper ball tray D20 in accordance with the above, and a prize ball payout for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10. A control board KH, a launching device D42 that shoots the game balls (pooled balls) in the upper ball tray D20 one by one into the game area D30, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, and a pachinko game machine. A power supply unit E that supplies power to each part, a power switch Ea that turns on/off the power of the pachinko game machine, and the like are provided on the rear surface of the front frame D14 (opposite side to the game side).

Next, a schematic electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, has a main control board M that controls the progress of the game, and pays out game balls based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to control and the main control board M, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative pattern, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, a sub-main control section SM and a sub-sub-control section SS are arranged on one board) for controlling lighting of the game effect lamp D26, execution of error notification, etc.; A power supply unit E for supplying power to the entire game machine including the control board is the main component. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stoppage of decorative patterns, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. and a sub-sub control unit SS for executing display processing such as variable display/stop display of decorative symbols on the effect display device SG, pending display, and advance notice display. In addition, the main control board M, prize ball payout control board KH, sub-main control unit SM and sub-sub control unit SS include a CPU for performing various arithmetic processing, a ROM for pre-storing a program defining the arithmetic processing of the CPU, and a CPU. Equipped with a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by (various data generated during games, computer programs read from ROM, etc.), and a backup area (and backup power supply) to retain information in the event of a power failure. ing. Also, the sub-main control unit SM has a real-time clock RTC that continuously keeps the current time with an internal power supply.

Here, the real-time clock RTC is a timekeeping device (integrated circuit) provided on the substrate of the sub-main control unit SM. The real-time clock RTC has a separate power supply (battery) that is independent of the power supply for the CPU on the board, and is set at the time of shipment from the factory in order to continue timing even when power is not being supplied to the game machine. Based on the given date/time, it is possible to supply the current date/time. However, the real-time clock RTC, like a general crystal clock, uses the vibration of quartz to keep time. An error of about 0.3 to 2.0 seconds may occur.

Schematic configurations of the substrates and electrical connections between the substrates and devices will be described below. First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game starting entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, the second 1 large winning opening winning detection device C11s, 2nd large winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (although not shown, the general winning opening is always open regardless of whether a special game is executed or not. Also, there is a prize ball, but a symbol lottery is not performed)}, a driving solenoid (not shown) (first big winning solenoid C13, second big winning solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc., which are input/output devices essential for the progress of the game (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B, first and second main game shared in the figure) It is electrically connected to the peripheral device C and the auxiliary game peripheral device H), and controls the progress of the game based on the input signal from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub-control board S (sub-main control section SM, sub-sub control section SS), and prize ball payout is performed based on the game progress. etc. to the prize ball payout control board KH, and information (commands) to the sub control board S about the performance/game progress and the like. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown). It is configured to be able to output game-related information from to an external device.

In addition, in this embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (either serial communication or parallel communication may be used for the communication method). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

Next, the prize ball payout control board KH includes a prize ball payout device KE for executing game ball payout, and a device operable by the player that accepts a game ball lending request and sends the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R that transmits. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, a control circuit unit (firing control board D40) of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board KH, and the prize ball payout control board KH and the launching device D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feeder, etc.). In this embodiment, the game ball lending device R is a separate unit adjacent to the gaming machine, but it may be integrated with the gaming machine. Control and management control of recording media for lending electronic money or the like may be performed in an integrated manner.

Next, the sub-control board S includes, as described above, the performance display device SG for displaying decorative patterns and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other driving devices for performance (not shown, but a so-called performance It is connected to a motor, solenoid, etc. of a movable body accessory for use. In this embodiment, as described above, the sub-control board S has the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS. Lighting control of the illumination lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be In this embodiment, the sub-main control section SM and the sub-sub-control section SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as separate boards). (Although it may be possible to do so, there are merits such as a space merit and a reduction in the situation where noise is mixed in the wiring etc.). Also, the division of work between the two controllers can be appropriately changed, for example, the sub-sub-controller SS executes voice control (preferable when adopting a VDP integrated with a voice control circuit). Also, instead of giving physical prize balls as prize balls, electronic values may be given.

Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M includes game peripherals related to games (first main game peripheral A, second main game peripheral B, first and second main game shared peripheral C, auxiliary game peripheral H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the production, and a prize ball payout control board KH that controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on payout instructions from the main control board M, and are connected so that information can be transmitted. ing. In addition, the sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub-sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) that executes image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE having a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control section SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub-control section SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. It consists of elements such as a ROM and a RAM used for processing, a CPU used for arithmetic processing, and the like. Incidentally, each means included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. FIG. The details of each means (apparatus) will be described below.

In addition, the "random number" in the claims and this specification is, for example, "0" to "65535" (2-byte random number) assigned according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determination random number) It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255” (1-byte random number) and “0” to “999”. Moreover, the random numbers may not be mathematically generated random numbers, but may be pseudo-random numbers generated by hardware random numbers, software random numbers, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method of expressing values in order along the sequence of random numbers (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed (initial value ) is determined by an accidental value (initial value update method), a combination of these methods, and the like.

In addition, the limited frequency is defined in advance after a specific pattern (a pattern that causes a special electric role to be activated, such as a big win pattern or a small win pattern) is stopped and displayed, and the operation of the special electric role is completed. The type of variation and/or selection rate of the main game symbols in the period (the period may be plural) changes, and the state in which one or more variations are controlled in the predetermined period described above (limited frequency status). Further, the lottery table for determining the variation mode referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbols in the limited frequency state is called a limited frequency table, and the limited frequency table may have a plurality of types, and the last time The limited frequency table to be referred to is switched depending on the type of specific symbol that triggered the activation of the special electric accessory, the number of times the main game symbol changes after the special game is finished, and the like. Also, switching from a state in which the limited frequency table A is referenced (also referred to as a limited frequency A state) to a state in which the limited frequency table B is referenced (also referred to as a limited frequency table B state), or when the limited frequency table A is referred to from the state of using the common variation mode determining lottery table commonly used in the current game state (normal state) to the state of referring to the limited frequency table B. It is called a frequency state transition. It should be noted that one game state may have a plurality of limited frequency states, and one game state may be configured to transition to the limited frequency state a plurality of times. In addition, when determining the variation mode of the main game pattern with reference to the limited frequency table, the selection rate of the variation mode is changed with reference to the common limited frequency table (that is, the variation mode itself to be selected is are the same, but the selection rate is different) (or the variation mode and selection rate to be selected are the same, but a further fixed value is added to the variation time value related to the selected variation mode. ) may be employed.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counters) that can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. there is Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c for counting winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko game machine according to this example has a probability variable number counter MP51c capable of counting the number of probability variable times, and a time saving number counter MP52c capable of counting the number of time saving times. Here, the "specific game" is, for example, a probability variable game in which the lottery probability to the special game is higher than in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main game pattern is relatively shorter than in the normal game, Furthermore, it refers to the auxiliary game time-saving game state (open extension state) related to the second main game starter electric accessory (sometimes referred to as normal electric accessory).

Here, in this embodiment, during the time reduction game, the fluctuation time of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols is relatively shortened (time reduction function). Furthermore, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbols is relatively shortened, and the opening time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (opening time extension function). Also, the time reduction game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main game symbols and the number of fluctuations of the second main game symbols exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of times of time saving is configured to be subtracted each time the first main game pattern and the second main game pattern change (stop). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, for example, has a function of performing a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time shortening game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability each time the pattern changes. Good (in the case of a pachinko game machine with a so-called falling lottery function).

Next, game peripherals will be described. Since the detailed configuration of some peripheral devices has already been described, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are the first main game peripheral device A, which is the peripheral device on the first main game side, the second main game peripheral device B, which is the peripheral device on the second main game side, and the first main game side. And the first and second main game shared peripheral device C which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, the auxiliary game peripheral device H related to the auxiliary game, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, the sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control section SM are based on the results of the game, including the variation of the decorative symbols in time synchronization with the variation of the first main game symbols and the second main game symbols. It concerns the display of only non-influential information. These peripheral devices will be described in order below.

First, the first main game peripheral device A consists of a first main game starting port A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that is capable of displaying the first main game symbols in a stationary and variable manner. ,have.

Next, the second main game peripheral device B includes a second main game starting port B10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that is capable of displaying stationary and variable second main game symbols. and have

Next, the shared peripheral device C for the first and second main games is closed during the normal game, and is opened under predetermined conditions during the special game (big win). and a second big winning hole C20, and the second big winning hole C20 which is closed during a normal game and is opened under a predetermined condition during a sorting game.

Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H is the auxiliary game start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. It has an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of.

The performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS is electrically connected to a performance display device SG that displays an image related to the performance based on information from the performance display means (sub-sub control section) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative pattern display area SG11 for displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner, and a first pending display portion SG12 (and a second pending display portion SG13) for displaying main game pending information. ing.

In addition, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit ) SS is connected to the sub-game control means (sub-main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control. means controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. It should be noted that another peripheral device may be controlled via another peripheral device controlled by the main control board M and one-way communication (one-way communication).

Next, FIG. 4 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. As shown in FIG. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. 1(a) is executed. That is, after turning on the power of the gaming machine and performing initial settings (although not shown, register initialization, input/output port settings, etc. are performed), in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the RAM The input port of the clear button is confirmed, and whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation to clear the contents of the RAM has been intentionally performed by the manager of the game arcade or the like. determine whether or not If Yes at step 1002, at step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits RAM clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub-main control unit SM side (transmitted at the relevant timing). (Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted in a control command transmission process, which will be described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016 . On the other hand, if No in step 1002, in step 1008, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power failure and the contents stored in the RAM area). comparison with the amount of information available). Next, at step 1010, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are normal (whether or not the information at the time of power failure is correctly backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clearing process described above). On the other hand, if No in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M will be stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M. , and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (they may be transmitted at this timing, or the commands may be set at this timing, which will be described later). may be configured to transmit in the control command transmission process), the process proceeds to step 1016 . Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) is permitted {as a result, when the scheduled execution interrupt timing is reached, (b) in the figure is executed}, and in step 1018 Transition. After executing the process of step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, random number counter increment process) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPUMC of the main control board M executes the processing shown in FIG. That is, with the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt at approximately 1.5 ms intervals) as a trigger, at step 1100, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process, which will be described later. . Next, at step 1200, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an electric accessary product drive determination process, which will be described later. Next, at step 1300, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes main game content determination random number acquisition processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1400, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process which will be described later. Next, at step 1500, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes special game operation condition determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a special game control process which will be described later. Next, in step 1910, the main control board M (especially the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs prize ball payout control processing (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the prize winning opening into which the game ball has entered. The payout control board KH is caused to execute and the processing for managing the results, etc.) is executed. Next, at step 1920, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing (output of information to an external terminal board, hall computer HC, etc.). Next, at step 1930, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (transmits the command set in each processing described above to the sub-main control unit side), and immediately before execution of this interrupt processing Return to what was being done.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured so that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and when the power supply to the gaming machine is interrupted, the process of FIG. is executed. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when NMI is interrupted), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power failure information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPUMC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

Next, FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered (flowed in, or passed through in the case of a gate) the auxiliary game starting port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M is information indicating that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start hole H10 is detected, an auxiliary game start hole entry detection command. , is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1930). Next, at step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of retained balls is the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1104, at step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the reserved ball by setting the random number together with the information indicating what number the ball is reserved, and performs the next process (process of step 1200). transition to Note that even if No in steps 1102 and 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 6 is a flow chart of the electric accessary product drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the electric accessory open flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 1204, at step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a reserved ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time saving flag), and the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H. Refer to it, and determine the stop symbol based on the obtained auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, compared to the case when it is off to select a winning symbol with high probability) and temporarily store it in the RAM area of the main control board M.

Here, the right side of the same figure is an example of the lottery table for determining the auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are "D0, D1, D2" as the stop symbols, and "D1, D2" as the winning symbols. The opening mode of the electric accessory to be opened by pressing is (open for 0.2 seconds→closed) when the stopped symbol is "D1, D2" in the non-time shortening game. Further, in the time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 1 second→close for 1 second→open for 1 second→close for 1 second→open for 1 second→close), and stop. When the drawn pattern is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.8 seconds→open for 4.0 seconds→close). In addition, when it is a non-time reduction game (when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off), the stop pattern is likely to be a losing pattern "D0", and during the time reduction game (when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is on) The winning/failure lottery table for the auxiliary game is configured to be different in each game state so that the stop symbol is likely to become the winning symbol "D1" (whether or not the auxiliary game probability changing function is activated).

Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H to the auxiliary game symbol variation time based on the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game time reduction flag). (For example, 1 second when the auxiliary game time saving flag is on, 5.5 seconds when the auxiliary game time saving flag is off) is set. Then, at step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the holding information recorded in the RAM area of the main control board M after subtracting 1 from the holding balls related to the auxiliary game symbols, and also updates the auxiliary game symbols. After starting the variable management timer MP11t-H, the variable display of the auxiliary game symbols is started on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and determines whether or not the predetermined time related to the auxiliary game symbol variation time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols and confirms and displays the acquired stop symbols of the auxiliary game symbols on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g. do. Then, at step 1228, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game symbol fluctuating flag.

Next, at step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit" (D1 and D2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the CPUMC of the main control board M is based on the winning pattern and game state on the auxiliary game side, and the opening mode (for example, in the case of the winning pattern "D1" during the time reduction game is open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed for 1 second → open for 1 second → closed; 4.0 seconds open → closed mode) is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening/closing time) of the electric accessory is set to the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B. Next, at step 1234, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the electric accessory open flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second main game starter electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and then opens the second main game starter electric accessory B11d.

Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the second main game starter electric accessory opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the opening time of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. Determine whether the time has arrived. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in steps 1244 and 1246, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, and in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. , the electric accessary product open flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1300).

If No in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1242; if No in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224; (Processing of step 1300).

Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1226, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next process after a stop display fixing time of about 500 ms (for example, this process may be performed by branching using the stop display fixing flag and timer. achievable). By controlling in this way, it is possible to provide a sufficient amount of time for the player to visually recognize that the winning symbol "D0" has stopped in the auxiliary game. In addition, since the display of the winning pattern continues while the electric accessory is operating, when the winning pattern stops, the stop display fixed time is shorter than when the losing pattern is stopped, or the stop display fixed time is not set. By doing so, it is possible to make the progress of the game smoother.

Next, FIG. 7 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start entrance ball information has been received from the first main game start entrance ball detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10, which is the information indicating that the game ball entered the first main game start port A10. A sphere detection command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control section SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1930).

Next, at step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially the first main game side) is not the upper limit (eg, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1306, at step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the first main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining winning or losing, the symbol lottery random number for determining the symbol at the time of winning, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random number for doing are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated by random number generation means with different update cycles and random number ranges, and are obtained in succession at this timing. Next, at step 1310, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the obtained first main game content determination random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the acquired information (suspension generation command) related to the first main game random number to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1930).

Next, in step 1322, CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start entrance ball information from the second main game start entrance ball detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the CPUMC of the main control board M detects the entry of the game ball into the second main game start opening B10. A sphere detection command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control section SM (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM by the control command transmission processing in step 1930).

Next, at step 1326, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the main game (especially the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, 4). In the case of Yes at step 1326, at step 1328, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the second main game content determination random number. In this embodiment, three random numbers are obtained as the second main game content determination random number, the win/fail lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number, similarly to the first main game content determination random number. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number for the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range for each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game acquisition range) are set to the same. Next, at step 1330, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, at step 1332, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the acquired information (suspension generation command) related to the second main game random number in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( It is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1400). If No in steps 1302 and 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322. If No in steps 1322 and 1326, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

In this embodiment, as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in steps 1312 and 1332, information related to the obtained random number is transmitted. The pending number may be sent together, and these pieces of information can be used as information indicating that the random number has been acquired.

Next, FIG. 8 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms whether or not the second main game symbol is reserved. In the case of Yes at step 1401, at step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No at step 1401, at step 1400 (2), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main game symbol display process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (step 1500).

Thus, in this embodiment, when there is a reserved ball of the second main game pattern, regardless of the presence of a reserved ball of the first main game pattern (even if the winning order is the reserved ball of the first main game pattern) Although it is configured to preferentially execute the pending digestion of the second main game symbol, it is not limited to this (pending digestion based on the winning order, and simultaneous parallel execution of both main game symbols It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws lots).

Next, FIG. 9 is a flow chart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) relating to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. Since this process is substantially the same for the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, at step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the fluctuation start condition is that the special game is not in progress (or the condition device is in operation), the main game pattern is not fluctuating, and the main game pattern corresponding to the current process is suspended (first main game pattern display In the case of processing, the condition is that there is a hold related to the first main game. Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, the process proceeds to the next step immediately after displaying the stop symbol in step 1423, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, a variable fixed time of about 500 ms (time to stop and display the confirmed display pattern after the main game pattern is confirmed) is provided, and during the variable fixed time, the next fluctuation start condition is not satisfied. , the process may be shifted to the next process after the variable fixed time has passed (for example, this process can be achieved by branching using a flag and a timer during the variable fixed time). By controlling in this way, it is possible to set a time period during which the player can sufficiently visually recognize that the winning symbols have stopped in the main game. In addition, since the display of the big hit pattern (or small hit pattern) continues during the big hit (or small hit), when the big hit pattern (or small hit pattern) stops, the lost pattern is stopped. It is conceivable to make the progress of the game smoother by shortening the variable fixed time or eliminating the variable fixed time.

If Yes at step 1403, at steps 1405 and 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M temporarily stores the first main game content determination random number ( Second main game content determination random number) is read out, deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and each of the storage areas of the remaining temporarily stored pending information is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each game state. , based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game pattern winning lottery is executed.

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success/failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a big win in the probability varying gaming state is higher than that in the non-probability varying gaming state. It should be noted that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this at all. Also, in the present embodiment, the game state {probability variation game state, time reduction game state (on/off of the main game time reduction flag, on/off of the auxiliary game time reduction flag)} is not performed ( Although a so-called small hit is not illustrated, it may be configured so that a small win is generated (a small win is won).

Next, at step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), Based on the game symbol lottery result and the symbol lottery random number of the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number), the stop symbols related to the main game symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M. Remember.

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 2) is an example of the first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates ("4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B" in this example) are selected. It is configured such that one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. In addition, the number of rounds and opening pattern of the special game determined with reference to the main game pattern are: 4A is an 8-round short open jackpot, 4B is a 16-round short open jackpot, 5A and 5B are an 8-round long open jackpot, and 7A. And 7B is a 16 round long open jackpot. In addition, the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples and are not limited to these {for example, the lost symbols are not limited to one type of symbol, and may be configured to provide multiple types of symbols. Alternatively, when a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of variation and/or selection rate of the main game pattern is different from before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). may be configured to migrate}. Here, the short opening/long opening can be realized by varying the opening time of the big winning opening (the first big winning opening C10 and/or the second big winning opening C20) per round. In the case of short opening, the game ball is opened for a very short time (eg, 1.8 s to 4.0 s) to the extent that 1 to 3 balls can be entered, while in the case of long opening, it is opened for a long time (eg , 30s) can be exemplified by opening (however, it is also possible to change the upper limit of the number of balls entering the big winning hole per round. For example, in the case of short opening, the upper limit of the number of balls entering While the number = 1, in the case of long opening, the upper limit number of incoming balls = 10, etc.).

In addition, as will be described later, a special game execution round (1 At least one ball can be entered during the round) may be provided. By implementing the opening period of the minimum time in the round in which the second big prize opening is opened, it may be controlled to execute a round in which the ball is not supposed to enter the specific area C22, and such control is performed. In this case, it is preferable to set the opening mode of the shield member C22c and the structure of the inside of the big winning opening so that the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 even if the game ball enters during the open period. . Also, during the special game, on the performance display device SG, the number of winning balls (the number of winning balls, the number of valid entering balls) acquired during the special game is cumulatively displayed for each round or for the started/executed rounds. good too. In addition, it is not limited to this, and if the game ball is continuously fired in a round in which only a short opening (for example, the opening of the minimum time mentioned above) is performed, the number of shots and the number of payouts will increase substantially. If it is not expected, the number of long open rounds (rounds in which the maximum number of balls can be entered) that has already been executed during the special game, or the number of balls obtained in the long open rounds may be configured to display only on the effect display device SG. By constructing in this way, the player can visually confirm how many rounds have been executed in which the number of actually paid balls can be obtained. In addition, during the special game, it is necessary to execute the notification of the round that is easy to acquire the ball to be executed (round including long opening) and the round that is easy to acquire the ball that has been executed in all special games. Instead, for example, it may be configured to be executed only during a special game at the time of the first hit (a jackpot won in a non-probability variable game state and a time reduction game state), or a special game related to the first main game side The presence or absence of execution may differ depending on the special game related to the second main game side, and the effect control state (effect mode, stay (which may be referred to as a stage) may be changed depending on whether or not execution is performed.

Next, at step 1410-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) corresponding to each game state. ), determine the variation mode of the main game symbols based on the result of the lottery result of the main game symbols and the variation mode lottery random number of the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number), and control these by the main control It is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the board M, and the process proceeds to step 1415 .

Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 3) is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbols is determined based on the lottery result of the main game symbols and the state of the main game time saving flag. That is, when the winning lottery result of the main game pattern is a hit, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game time saving flag is on (time saving game state) It is configured such that the variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. It should be noted that this example is merely an example, and the types of stop symbols, the selection rate, and the like are not limited at all. In addition, in this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, different tables are not provided according to the number of reserved balls, but it goes without saying that different tables may be provided according to the number of reserved balls. do not have. Furthermore, it may be configured so that the symbol fluctuation time on the first main game side in the time reduction game state (when the main game time reduction flag is ON) is relatively long {symbols on the second main game side When it is configured so that the execution of the variation is advantageous to the player, it is easy for the second main game to hold the second main game by reducing the symbol variation efficiency of the first main game (advantageous to the player). (because it is intended to build a situation), it is particularly effective when it is not possible to distinguish between the first main game side start opening and the second main game side start opening}. In addition, during the period corresponding to the period predetermined as the limited frequency, the symbol variation time is determined using the limited frequency table.

Next, at step 1415, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command (stop symbol information, attribute information of the stop symbol, variation mode information, etc.) related to the main game symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and A command related to the current game state (symbol variation display start instruction command) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission processing in step 1930, the sub-main control unit SM side sent to). Next, at step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C to a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbols. Next, at step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g), according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbols is started. Next, at step 1418, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuating flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

On the other hand, if No at step 1403, at step 1419, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the fluctuating flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, at step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbols has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 1420, at step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information to the effect that the pattern variation will end (symbol confirmation display instruction command) for command transmission to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set in the buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing in step 1930). Next, at step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display portion) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) The variable display of the main game symbols on the screen is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the RAM area of the main control board M are controlled to be displayed as fixed stop symbols. Next, at step 1424, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuating flag.

Next, at step 1430, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol. If Yes at step 1430, at step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device activation flag. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

Next, at step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes specific game end determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1500). Note that even if No in step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500).

Next, FIG. 11 is a flow chart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the probability variable number counter MP51c by 1 (decrement). Next, in step 1456, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining probability variation number) is zero. In the case of Yes at step 1456 , at step 1458 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation flag and proceeds to step 1462 . On the other hand, if step 1452 or step 1456 is No, the process proceeds to step 1462 as well.

Next, at step 1462, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1462, in step 1464, the CPUMC of the main control board M decrements the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c by 1 (decrement). Next, in step 1466, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c, and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time saving number) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1466, in steps 1468 and 1470, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1500 process). Note that even if No in steps 1462 and 1466, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1500). It should be noted that, in this embodiment, since the time reduction game state of the main game side and the time reduction game state of the auxiliary game side are synchronized, based on the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c of the main game side auxiliary game side The time reduction game state is controlled, but if the time reduction game state between the main game side and the auxiliary game side is not synchronized, by separately providing a time reduction counter on the auxiliary game side, each independently It may be managed.

Next, FIG. 12 is a flow chart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the conditional device operation flag (flag for operating the accessory continuous operating device for continuously operating the special electric accessory) is on. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability variable flag, main game time reduction flag, auxiliary game time reduction flag). Next, at step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variable number counter MP51c. Next, at step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the time saving counter MP52c. Next, at step 1510, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the special game transition permission flag. Next, at step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). Incidentally, even if No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). In addition, the description of FIG. 12 in this embodiment is an example of a game machine that does not have a small win, and a small win that is a special game (a win that the condition device is not activated and the special electric accessory is activated) is won. If you do, only control to turn on the special game transition permission flag is executed without clearing the main game probability variation flag/main game time reduction flag and clearing the probability variation number counter MP51c/time reduction number counter MP52c.

Next, FIG. 13 is a flow chart of special game control processing related to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, at step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is ON. If Yes at step 1602, at steps 1604 and 1606, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag. Next, at step 1608, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, at step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control section side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930), and the process proceeds to step 1614. FIG.

On the other hand, if No at step 1602, at step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. Then, if Yes in step 1612 , the process proceeds to step 1614 . Incidentally, in the case of No in step 1612, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the special game is not permitted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the number of rounds being executed in the special game is a distribution game execution round (a round opened by the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22). , in this example, the second R and the fourth R). In the present embodiment, the second round and the fourth round, which are not continuous, are the rounds related to the opening of the second big winning hole C20. When the game area D30 is stored in a specific place (so-called ball clogging), the player is instructed to play the game again to the second big winning port C20 (or the specific area C22). The purpose is to provide an opportunity to enter the ball {whether or not the game state after the special game becomes a probability variable game state is the possibility of entering the second large winning opening C20 (or the specific area C22) Such intent is important because it is determined by}. In addition, in the present embodiment, two rounds are provided for opening the second big prize opening C20, but this is not a limitation, and a larger number of rounds are provided for opening the second big prize opening C20. may be

In the case of Yes at step 1614 , at step 1650 , the CPUMC of the main control board M executes distribution game execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1640 .

On the other hand, if No at step 1614, at step 1616, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not each round is about to start. If Yes in step 1616, that is, if it is just before the start of each round, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that keeps opening, a pattern that opens and closes). Next, at step 1620, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, at step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first big winning gate electric accessory C11d to open the first big winning gate C10, and the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the process proceeds to step 1626 . On the other hand, if No in step 1616, that is, if the big winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1626 without performing the processing of steps 1618-1624.

Next, at step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command related to the current special game (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) to the side of the sub-main control unit SM. (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930). Next, at step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not there are a predetermined number of winning balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first big winning hole C10 in the round. determine whether If Yes in step 1628 , go to step 1632 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1628, in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer), and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the opening of the big winning opening. determines whether or not has elapsed. If Yes at step 1630 , the process also proceeds to step 1632 . If No in step 1630, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1910).

Next, at step 1632, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the driving of the first big winning opening electric accessory C11d of the first big winning opening C10 to close the first big winning opening C10. Next, at step 1634, the CPUMC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer). Next, at step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, at step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown).

Next, at step 1640, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether or not the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) has exceeded the maximum number of rounds). . In the case of Yes at step 1640, at step 1642, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, at step 1644, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect that the special game is to end, to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side. It is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930). Next, at step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910). Note that even if No in step 1640, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 13 in this embodiment. First, at step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game running flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1652, that is, in the case that the sorting game is being executed, the process of step 1666 and subsequent steps pertaining to the determination of the end of the sorting game is performed.

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the stop symbol that triggered the special game to long open the second big winning opening C20 (distribution winning opening C20). It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined big hit pattern (5A, 7A or 5B, 7B in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1654, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M displays a long opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 (for example, opening for 15 seconds, opening the game to the specific area C22) An opening pattern of the second big winning hole C20 that facilitates ball entry is set, and the process proceeds to step 1660. At this time, as the operation pattern of the shielding member placed near the specific area C22, the residual ball flowing down time considering the flowing down time of the game ball in the big winning opening (15 seconds + the time when the game ball entered the big winning opening is large) This is the time to ensure that the game ball is discharged to the winning opening side, for example, 1 second), from the start of the opening operation of the big winning opening, the game ball is permitted to enter the specific area C22 (for example, the above-mentioned first position). On the other hand, if No in step 1654, that is, if the jackpot pattern is 4A or 4B, then in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M generates a short game including a minimal opening of the second big winning hole C20 having the specific area C22. Opening pattern, for example, opening for 0.052 seconds (starting to open the flow path to the specific region C22 by the shielding member) → closing for 5 seconds (during this period, blocking the flow path to the specific region C22 by the shielding member) → 4 seconds Set the opening pattern of the second big winning hole C20 which is open (the closing time after the last opening is not provided) and makes it difficult for game balls to enter the specific area C22, and proceeds to step 1660. Next, at step 1660, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears (zeroes) the value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1662, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game running flag. Next, at step 1664, the distribution game execution control means MP36 starts opening the second big winning opening C20 according to the opening pattern set in the above process. In addition, even if it is a special game related to the pattern corresponding to the short opening pattern, it is possible to pass through the specific area C22 at the time of opening after that without performing the shielding control by the shielding member during the period of closing once. , Even if the appearance of the opening of the big winning opening is a disadvantageous pattern, the game ball enters the specific area C22 because the shielding member was actually opened, and the advantageous state after the special game ends ( It may have a reverse short open pattern (short open pattern advantageous to the player) that implements control to be controlled to a probability variable gaming state).

Next, at step 1666, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of game balls have entered the second big winning hole C20. . In the case of Yes at step 1666, at step 1670, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second big prize winning opening C20. On the other hand, if No at step 1666, at step 1668, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second prize winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes at step 1668, the process proceeds to step 1670 to close the second big winning opening C20. Next, at step 1672, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the long open flag. Next, at step 1674, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game running flag.

Next, at step 1676, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes at step 1676 , at step 1678 , the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation transition reservation flag, and proceeds to step 1680 . On the other hand, if No in step 1676, the process proceeds to step 1680 as well. Next, at step 1680, the CPUMC of the main control board M increments the value of the round number counter by 1 (ends the execution round of the distribution game), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1640). do. Incidentally, even if No in step 1668, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1640).

Next, FIG. 15 is a flow chart of the game state determination process after the special game ends, according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, at step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variable probability transition reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the variable probability transition reservation flag. Next, at step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of times of variation of the main game symbols (for example, 150) in which the probability variation gaming state continues in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, at step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the time reduction number counter MP52c to the number of fluctuations of the main game symbols that the time reduction game state continues (especially, when the time reduction game state is set during the probability fluctuation game state is set to the same value as the value set in the probability variable number counter MP51c, for example, 150), and the process proceeds to step 1714. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of fluctuations of the main game symbols that the time reduction game state continues to the time reduction number counter MP52c (especially when the probability fluctuation game state does not occur). It is a time reduction game state, for example, 100) is set and the process moves to step 1714 .

In addition, it is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the number of fluctuations in the time reduction gaming state given in the probability fluctuation gaming state is greater than the number of fluctuations in the probability fluctuation gaming state. That is, after the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state are completed, the non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state may be entered. By constructing in this way, even if the big win is not won in the probability variable game state, the time-reduced game state continues even after that, that is, the state advantageous to the player continues for a certain period of time. As a result, a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

Next, in steps 1714 and 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag and the auxiliary game time saving flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 1910 process).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 24, control processing executed by the sub-main control unit SM will be described. First, FIG. 16 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub-control board S (especially on the side of the sub-main control section SM) in the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4(d) is a process on the side of the sub-main control unit SM that is executed after resetting such as when power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when the game machine is powered on, at step 2050, the sub-main control section SM executes an initial process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM permits execution of interrupt processing. After that, the process shifts to loop processing for repeatedly executing (e), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (e) is executed, first, in step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a hold information management process, which will be described later, as shown in the process of (e) in FIG. Next, at step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a first suggestion effect execution control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a second suggestion effect execution control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes decorative symbol display content determination processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes decorative symbol display control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a special game-related display control process, which will be described later. Next, at step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes firing position notification control processing, which will be described later. Next, at step 2020, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes the display command transmission control process (transmits the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub-subcontroller SS side), and ends this repeat processing routine. do.

As described above, the sub-main control unit SM adopts a form of performing loop processing of the sub-main side routine (S2100 to S2700 and S2020) after resetting. Further, the processing of FIG. 4(f) is the interrupt processing of the sub-main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M is transmitted to one terminal of the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (in this example, , NMI terminal). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub-main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S receives the command input port from the main control board M side. (the input port of the data signal line described above). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M in the RAM of the sub-main control unit SM based on the confirmation result, and Return to the process that was being executed.

Next, the process of FIG. 10G is a flow chart of the power failure process when receiving a power failure signal from the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like, for example. That is, when the power interruption signal is received, at step 2014, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores the game-related information stored in the RAM in the save area. Next, at step 2016, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts supplying reserve power to the evacuation area. Next, in step 2018, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S prohibits the execution of interrupt processing, and shifts to a power failure waiting loop. In addition, it is not limited to this, and an area to which reserve power is automatically supplied even after power failure is provided in RAM (or a RAM is provided to which reserve power is automatically supplied), and game-related information is stored in the area. may be configured to be stored in

Next, FIG. 17 is a flow chart of initial processing related to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, at step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RAM clear information from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the information (particularly, game-related information) stored in the retreat area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2002). .

On the other hand, if No at step 2052, at step 2056, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not various information commands have been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the information (particularly, game-related information) stored in the save area, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2002). .

On the other hand, if No in step 2056, that is, if neither RAM clear information nor various information commands have been received from the main control board M side, the process proceeds to step 2052 until a command is received from the main control board M side. , a loop process in which steps 2052 and 2056 are executed.

Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the pending information management process related to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a command set related to the occurrence of a new hold from the main control board M side (information that can identify the number of holds related to the first main game and the second main game, newly acquired It determines whether or not it has received information related to the random number value obtained, information for use in prior determination, etc.). In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S puts " 1” is added. Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sends the pending information (in particular, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) to the sub-control board S based on the pending generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. is temporarily stored in the RAM area of , and the process proceeds to step 2116 .

In addition, as a configuration related to a command related to the occurrence of a new hold, the number of holds on the first main game side in the upper (4 bits) and the number of holds on the second main game side in the lower (4 bits) are sub-controls from the main control board M side. The holding number information collectively transmitted to the board S side and stored on the sub control board S side is compared with the received holding numbers of the first main game side and the second main game side, and the first main game It may be configured such that it is determined that a new hold has occurred if there is a change in the number of holds between the number of holds on the side and the number of holds on the second main game side. In addition, by comparing the information about the number of reservations received by the sub control board S side and the information about the number of reservations stored on the side of the sub control board S, the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side If the number of reservations changes by 2 or more in total with the number of reservations, it may be configured to cancel the prefetch effect being executed, or a prefetch lottery will be performed for the reservation related to the command that triggered the change of 2 or more. No (because it is impossible to determine whether information not stored as random numbers in the sub-control board S will be a hit or whether it will be a super reach). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, if the number of pending balls is not received due to command communication failure, etc., and the random number value or prefetch information is received, it is stored in the temporary save storage area, and the next pending It may be configured to store when a command for generation is successfully received. In addition, if the amount of change in the number of holds is 1 or more for the number of holds on the first main game side and the number of holds on the second main game side, respectively, the command related to the occurrence of a hold received this time (and last time) is Since it is not possible to determine whether the hold is related to the hold on the first main game side or the hold on the second main game side, in such a case, the hold related to the hold occurrence command received this time (and last time) may be configured not to execute the pre-reading lottery. Dummy data may also be stored for the random number information relating to each of the pending commands related to the current and previous pending commands received. In addition, if dummy data is stored in any of the holds in the hold, the prefetch lottery is not executed for the hold that occurred in the transition, and all the holds in which the dummy data is stored are consumed. It may be configured such that a prefetching lottery can be executed for pending that has occurred thereafter.

On the other hand, if No at step 2102, at step 2108, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has received a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts "1" from the drawing pending counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S deletes the pending information related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub-control board S and shifts the remaining pending information. Next, at step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the design content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS to display the design pending on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first pending display section SG12 and the second pending display section SG13). The same number of pending display lamps as the counter value are turned on, and the next process (process of step 2200) is performed. If No in step 2108 , the process proceeds to step 2116 .

Next, FIG. 19 is a flow chart of the first suggestive effect execution control process related to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction/variable probability game state.

In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the first suggestion effect execution flag (as described later, it is a flag that turns on when a hold that satisfies a predetermined condition occurs). Under the condition that the flag is ON, an image suggesting or notifying the existence of the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition is displayed) is OFF.

In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new hold on the second main game side (hereinafter referred to as a second main game hold) has occurred (in other words, the first It is determined whether or not a main game side hold, which is preferentially consumed, has occurred, out of the main game side hold and the second main game side hold. In the case of Yes in step 2206, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that if the symbol variation is being performed at the present time, the variation (currently executed variation) is a short opening jackpot (second big winning opening). A big win in which it is difficult to enter a ball into a specific area C22 because of the big win that involves opening C20 for a very short time, and it is difficult to shift to a probability variable game state after the special game related to the big win. In other words, after the end of the special game related to the big hit, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit that is scheduled to shift to a non-probability variation game state. Incidentally, the short-open jackpot may be referred to as a non-probable variable jackpot.

In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the pending information (for example, lottery random number, symbol determination random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, The success/fail result (and the type of stop symbol) of a certain second main game hold (including the new second main game hold) is determined in advance. Next, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the result of the prior determination, does not include any suspension that will result in a short-open jackpot among the suspensions to be completed before the new suspension (second main game suspension). Determine whether or not

In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the new second main game hold is a long-open jackpot (a jackpot that opens the second jackpot C20 for a long time). A big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 and is certain to shift to a probability variable game state after the special game related to the big win.In other words, after the special game related to the big win ends the probability variable game. It is determined whether or not it is a hold that will be a big hit scheduled to shift to the state. In the case of Yes at step 2214, at step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a first suggestion effect trigger pending lottery that wins with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Next, at step 2218, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first suggestion effect trigger holding lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2218, in step 2220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds information to the effect that the new hold (second main game hold) is the first suggestion effect trigger hold, and the sub control board S are stored in the RAM area of . Next, at step 2222, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the first suggestion effect execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). Incidentally, the long open jackpot may be referred to as a probability variable jackpot.

On the other hand, if No in step 2204, in other words, if there is a first suggestion effect trigger suspension that satisfies a predetermined condition, in step 2224, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the current is the first Determining whether or not it is the end timing of the variation related to the suggestion effect trigger suspension (Determines whether it is the pattern variation end time when the information indicating that the first suggestion effect trigger suspension is given) . In the case of Yes in step 2224, in step 2226, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first long opening suggesting image (an image notifying that if a big hit occurs while the image is being displayed, a variable probability big win will occur). A command is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300).

Here, as shown in the image diagram at the bottom of the same figure, the first long opening suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device SG, and the characters (in this example, "If you win big during this effect, you will win long open!") If a combination of decorative symbols that will result in a big hit is stopped and displayed by characters, etc., during the display of the image, it is possible to inform that a variable probability big win (not a non-variable big win) will occur. This example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to execute notification by sound (or simultaneously execute notification by image and sound).

On the other hand, if No at step 2202, at step 2228, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the first long opening suggestive image. Next, in steps 2230 and 2232, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the information indicating that the first suggestion effect trigger is being held from the hold temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S, The first suggested effect execution flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2300). It should be noted that even if No in step 2224 , the process proceeds to step 2228 .

With this configuration, the player can recognize that the probability variable big win has occurred since the first long opening suggesting image is displayed in the first suggesting effect execution control process. However, it is an essential execution condition to perform a preliminary determination of the success/failure determination result (and the type of stop symbol) of the unspent hold (in this example, especially the second main game hold) (on the other hand, As will be described later, in the second suggestive effect execution control process, it is possible to produce a similar action without performing this prior determination). This example is only an example, and is not limited to this. For example, as a condition for the occurrence of the first suggestion effect trigger suspension, even if the new suspension is not a suspension that results in a long open jackpot, the first suggestion effect trigger It may be configured to execute a pending lottery (in that case, the probability of winning is preferably lower than that of the lottery executed when the new pending is a long open jackpot), and a new It may be added to the occurrence condition that the fluctuation time at the time of digestion of the hold is a predetermined time or more (or that it becomes a so-called reach state due to the combination of decorative symbols), or at the time of digestion of the hold before the new hold It is possible to add to the generation condition that the fluctuation time does not exceed a predetermined time (or that a so-called ready-to-win state does not occur due to a combination of decorative symbols). However, when the first suggestion effect trigger suspension exists and when the first long opening suggestion image is displayed, it is notified that a probability variable big win can occur (non-probability variable big win cannot occur). Therefore, the condition for generating the first suggestion effect trigger suspension is that the new suspension is not a short open jackpot.

Next, FIG. 20 is a flow chart of the second suggestive effect execution control process related to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction/variable probability game state.

In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that if the symbol variation is being performed at the present time, the variation (currently being performed) is a short open jackpot (second big prize winning). It is determined whether or not it is a big win that opens the mouth C20 only for a very short time, and that it is a big win that is scheduled to shift to a non-probability variable game state after the special game related to the big win is finished.

In the case of Yes in step 2304, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first suggested effect execution flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2306, at step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second suggestive effect execution flag is off. Here, the purpose of determining whether or not the first suggested effect execution flag is off is to perform exclusive control of the first suggested effect execution control process and the second suggested effect execution control process (simultaneously parallel Therefore, if the above-described first suggestion effect execution control process is not implemented, it is supplemented that the determination process is not required.

In the case of Yes at step 2308, at step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the pattern fluctuation flag has turned from off to on (it is the pattern fluctuation start timing). In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2312, the CPUSC of the sub control board S wins with a predetermined probability (preferably lower probability than the aforementioned first suggestion effect trigger holding lottery, for example 1/10). , the second suggestion effect lottery is executed. Next, at step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second suggestion effect lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the second suggestive effect execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

On the other hand, if No in step 2308, that is, if the second suggestive effect execution flag is ON, in step 2318, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the second long opening suggestive image (when the image is displayed, If so, set a command to display an image that notifies that the probability variable jackpot will be won and is the same or substantially the same as the above-described first long opening suggesting image), and proceed to the next process (step 2400). do.

On the other hand, if No in step 2302, step 2304, or step 2306, in step 2320, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the second long opening suggestive image. Next, at step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the second suggestive effect execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400). Note that even if No in step 2310 or step 2314, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2400).

With this configuration, the player can recognize that the probability variable big win has occurred since the second long opening suggesting image is displayed in the second suggesting effect execution control process. However, as shown in this example, by controlling so that the second long opening suggesting image is not displayed at the latest by the end of the symbol variation related to the non-probability variable jackpot, the second long opening suggesting image is displayed as a result. It is constructed so that a variable probability big hit can occur during the period. That is, in the second suggestive effect execution control process, unlike the first suggestive effect execution control process, the determination result of the unspent hold (in this example, especially the second main game hold) (and the type of stop symbol) ), so it is easy to execute regardless of the state of occurrence of pending pending, the type of game state, and whether or not the game state transitions, and in the second suggestive effect execution control process, the second It is possible to continue to display "an image notifying that if a big hit occurs while the image is being displayed, a variable probability big hit will occur" for a longer period of time than in the 1 suggestion effect execution control process (for example, the first Suspended digestion on the main game side → Suspended digestion on the second main game side, or Suspended digestion on the second main game side → Suspended digestion on the first main game side. Even in such a situation, it is possible to continue to display it, and even in a situation where different game states are crossed, such as a probability variable game state → a non-probability variable game state, the display can be continued. In addition, the period of continuous display does not depend on the upper limit of the number of suspensions or the upper limit of the number of stays in the game state).

That is, to summarize the first suggested effect execution control process and the second suggested effect execution control process, <Feature 1> There is no hold on the first main game side that is not consumed and/or the second Even if there is no hold on the main game side, the first long opening suggesting image or the second long opening suggesting image can be continuously displayed <Feature 2> The first main game side hold that has not been consumed The first long opening suggesting image or the second long opening suggesting image can be continuously displayed even when the symbols on the second main game side change in the existing state, <Feature 3> The second main game that is not digested The first long opening suggesting image or the second long opening suggesting image can be continuously displayed even when the symbols on the first main game side change while the game side is on hold, <Feature 4> Second Even when the symbols on the first main game side change after the symbols on the main game side change, the first long opening suggesting image or the second long opening suggesting image can be continuously displayed. The first long opening suggesting image or the second long opening suggesting image can be continuously displayed even when the symbols on the second main game side change after the symbol variation, <Feature 6> Only the symbol variation on the first main game side Under the situation where it is performed, only the display/non-display of the second long opening suggestion image caused by the execution of the second suggestion effect execution control process is performed. In the situation where it is performed, not only the display/non-display of the second length opening suggesting image resulting from the execution of the second suggesting effect execution control process, but also the first length opening suggesting image resulting from the execution of the first suggesting effect execution control process The opening suggestion image is also displayed/hidden.

In the above example, the purpose is to clarify the difference in the control method between the first suggestive effect execution control process and the second suggestive effect execution control process. This is an example in which the occurrence of a non-probable variable jackpot becomes definite when it is hidden, but of course this example is insufficient to increase the interest of the game Additional configurations for enhancing the interest of the game will be described later as modified examples. In addition, as a condition for executing the display of the long opening suggestion image in this example, for example, the display is executed on the condition that a hold for a short opening jackpot has occurred (or a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the display) is executed), and the display may be erased before the fluctuation of the hold that becomes the short-open jackpot starts (that is, by making a prior determination).

Next, FIG. 21 is a flow chart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, at step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the design content determination permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the design content determination permission flag. Next, at step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the symbol information (stopping symbols/variation modes related to the main game symbols) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S, and the lottery for determining the details of the variation of the design. With reference to the table SM21ta, the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols {for example, when the stationary symbols related to the main game symbols are the jackpot symbols, doubles such as "7, 7, 7", and the losing symbols, , such as "1, 3, 5"} and variation mode {for example, if the variation mode related to the main game pattern is a short-time variation, non-reach, and if it is a long-time variation, normal reach , super reach, etc.) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub-control board S.

Next, at step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the design content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500). Note that even if No in step 2402, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2500).

Next, FIG. 22 is a flow chart of the decorative design display control process related to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, at step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the design content determination flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the design content determination flag. Next, at step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the symbol-fluctuation flag. Next, at step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the design variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2510. It should be noted that even if No in step 2502 , the process proceeds to step 2510 .

Next, at step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol-fluctuation flag is ON. If Yes at step 2510, at step 2511, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, at the variation start timing of the decorative design. Determine whether or not it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 2512, in step 2514, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the variable display command of the decorative pattern (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2020). , go to step 2530 .

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2512, in step 2516, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the decorative design based on the design variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. It is determined whether or not the display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (in the display command transmission control process of step 2020, the sub-sub control unit SS side ) and go to step 2530 .

On the other hand, if No in step 2516, in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the preview image and the It is determined whether or not the display timing of the ready-to-win image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2520, in step 2522, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the image display command for the preview image and reach image (in the display command transmission control process in step 2020, the sub-sub control unit SS side transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 2530 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2520 , the process proceeds to step 2530 .

Next, at step 2530, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the main game symbols are stop-displayed. In the case of Yes at step 2530, at step 2532, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a decorative pattern stop display command (determined display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process at step 2020). be done). Next, in step 2534, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (clears to zero) the design variation time management timer SM21t. Next, at step 2536, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the symbol-changing flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). It should be noted that even if No in step 2510 or step 2530, the next process (process of step 2600) is performed.

Next, FIG. 23 is a flow chart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, at step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2602, at step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in steps 2606 and 2608, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag and displays the start of the big win on the effect display device SG (as appropriate based on the type of big win). Display) command is set and the process proceeds to step 2612 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2602 , the process proceeds to step 2612 .

Next, at step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (playability and the type of jackpot, etc., and may be executed as necessary). Next, at step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 2614, at step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the end of the jackpot (appropriate display based on the type of jackpot) on the effect display device SG. Next, at step 2618, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the special game flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2700 process). Note that even if No in step 2604 or step 2614, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2700).

Next, FIG. 24 is a flow chart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the second notification image on the second layer (the front layer of the third layer that displays the decorative pattern) in the display control. do.

Here, as shown in the image diagram on the right side of the figure, the first notification image, the second notification image, and the third notification image are used to hit the player to the right (such that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30). A game ball is launched by adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball, and a first shooting intensity that enables the game ball to be shot to the game area D30, and a shooting intensity that is greater than the first shooting intensity and the game area D30. It means to indicate the second firing intensity in the case of defining the second firing intensity that allows the game ball to be released to). Also, regarding the concept of the first layer, the second layer, the third layer, and the fourth layer in display control, as shown in the lower part of the same image diagram, the first layer is the frontmost layer, the fourth layer is the rearmost layer, When the images to be displayed overlap, the image displayed in the front layer is preferentially displayed. Incidentally, the decorative pattern is displayed on the third layer.

Next, at step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has newly received the first main game start entrance ball detection command. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol-fluctuation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2708, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S puts the first layer (the front layer of the third layer displaying the decorative pattern and the second layer displaying the second notification image) in the display control. , sets a command to display the first notification image, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). Note that even if No in step 2706, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2708, that is, at the timing when the entry into the first main game start port A10 is detected during the time shortening game, and the pattern is stopped, in step 2712, the sub control board S The CPUSC sets a command to display the first notification image in the fourth layer (the layer behind the third layer displaying the decorative pattern and the second layer displaying the second notification image) in the display control, and performs the following processing. (Processing of step 2020). Note that even if No in step 2706, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020).

On the other hand, if No in step 2702, that is, if the current game state is not the time reduction game state, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2714, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the third Sets the command to display the notification image. Next, at step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it has newly received the first main game start entrance ball detection command. In the case of Yes in step 2718, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first notification image on the first layer (the front layer of the third layer that displays the decorative pattern and the third notification image) in the display control. A command to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). Note that if step 2714 or step 2718 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (step 2020). Here, when the special game in-progress flag is ON, that is, when the special game is being executed, the second notification image cannot be displayed. Therefore, when the special game is being executed It should be supplemented that it is constructed so as to be able to avoid confusion with the third notification image that is displayed in . Incidentally, the notification image during the special game (an image that is always displayed, in this example, the third notification image) may be displayed as the same image as the second notification image. In such a configuration, the display position of the notification image may be changed as appropriate (for example, the position displayed during the special game and the position displayed in the time reduction game state after the special game different from the position, or enlarged/reduced, etc.).

Here, in this embodiment, when the first main game start entrance detection command is received from the main control board M side during the time reduction game state or special game execution, the first notification image is displayed. However, along with the display of the first notification image, a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of voice notification (for example, voice notification of "Please hit right") may be executed (for example, "Please hit right"). please”→silence for a predetermined period→“please hit right”→silence for a predetermined period→“please hit right”). By configuring in this way, it is better for the player to hit right (to adjust the shooting intensity of the game ball and hit the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30). This means that the high profit can be communicated more reliably. Further, when the voice notification is executed together with the display of the first notification image, the display of the first notification image may be terminated at the timing when the number of times the voice notification is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. Furthermore, in the timing before the number of executions of the voice notification reaches the predetermined number of times, when the first main game start entrance detection command is newly received from the main side one or more times, from the timing Alternatively, it may be configured such that the voice notification and the display of the first notification image are executed again a predetermined number of times (from the timing at which the voice notification that is being executed ends).

Although not shown in this embodiment, the first notification image is a fixed still image, and the second notification image is a moving image that moves within a certain range. With this configuration, even if the second notification image is displayed smaller than the first notification image, the second notification image moves within a certain range (it is a moving image), so that the player can can be easily recognized.

With the above configuration, in the shooting position notification control process, the shooting strength of the game ball is adjusted so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30 during the course of the game. (In this example, the second main game start port B10 and the big winning port are provided on the right side of the game area D30, so during the time shortening game and during the special game), the game A plurality of patterns corresponding to the game situation (in this example, the decorative pattern is displayed on the third layer, and during the time reduction game state, the image instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed on the second layer). 2 notification images are displayed, especially in the case of detecting the entry of a ball into the first main game start port A10, the first notification image is displayed on the first layer while the symbols are changing, and the fourth layer is displayed while the symbols are stopped. Also, during the special game, the third notification image is displayed on the third layer at a position that does not overlap with the decorative pattern, especially to the first main game start port A10. is detected, the pattern of displaying the first notification image on the first layer) can be displayed, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

(Modified example of first suggested effect execution control process and second suggested effect execution control process)
Incidentally, as described above, the control method of the first suggestive effect execution control process and the second suggestive effect execution control process is not limited to those shown in the above embodiments, and in particular, There is room for further improvement in order to increase it. <Improvement example 1> For example, the first long opening suggestion effect is configured to start when the second main game is suspended, but the effect may be changed when the main game symbols start to fluctuate or during the execution of the special game. can be configured to start. Similarly, the second length opening suggestive effect can be started at the same timing as the start timing of the first length opening effect (when suspension occurs, when fluctuation starts, during special game execution, etc.). , it is possible to enhance the effect of the second long opening suggestion effect (so-called fake effect). <Improvement Example 2> Furthermore, the trigger for ending the long opening suggestion production (first long opening suggestion production and second long opening suggestion production) is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment (especially, In the case where the second long opening suggesting image is hidden only at the time of pattern change, the occurrence of the non-probable variable jackpot becomes definite when the second long opening suggesting image is hidden. Therefore, the second long opening suggestion image may be hidden even when the pattern changes related to the probability variable jackpot or when the pattern changes related to the loss). , If the end lottery is won, it may be configured to end the long open suggestion effect (in that case, if the hold that will be the first big hit in the hold is the hold that will be the long open big hit Low probability, high probability if the hold that will be the first big hit in the hold is the hold that will be the short open jackpot, medium probability if there is no hold that will be the big hit in the hold By doing so, it is possible to make the production more expected as the production continues). <Improvement Example 3> Also, at the start of the production, the upper limit number of fluctuations for which the production continues is determined, and when the number of fluctuations after that reaches the upper limit number of fluctuations, the production is completed. may It should be noted that, when executing a false effect, it is preferable to end the effect at least before the short-open jackpot.

In addition, after the special game is finished, the first long opening suggesting effect or the second long opening suggesting effect may be always executed. When the main game pattern that stops first after the end of is a 4B pattern (a pattern that becomes a non-time reduction game state and a non-probability fluctuation game state after executing a special game), the first length opening suggestion production or the second length In order to prevent the situation where the opening suggesting performance is being executed, the first long opening suggesting performance or the second long opening suggesting performance in which the discrepancy may occur is not executed at the start of the fluctuation of the main game symbols. is desirable.

Further, in the first suggesting effect execution control process and the second suggesting effect execution control process, in the case of the time shortening game state and the probability fluctuation game state, the first long opening suggesting image and the second long opening suggesting image are changed to "the relevant If a big hit occurs while the image is being displayed, the game is controlled to display an image that notifies the player of a variable probability big win. In the case of the game state and the probability variation game state, "an image notifying that the expectation of a big hit will increase if the image is displayed, or if the image is displayed, the current game state is the probability variation game It may be controlled to be an image that notifies that the possibility of being in a state increases, and of course, in the case of a non-time reduction gaming state and a non-probability fluctuation gaming state, the first long opening suggesting image and the first The 2-long opening suggesting image is controlled to be ``an image notifying that if a big hit occurs while the image is displayed, the probability variable jackpot will be won'', or ``if the image is displayed, the expectation of a big hit will increase. Alternatively, an image notifying that the possibility of the current game state being the probability variable game state increases if the image is displayed.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, by entering the game ball into the specific area C22 provided in the second big winning opening C20 during the special game, it is possible to shift to the probability variable game state after the special game ends. In a definite game machine (so-called ball-certain-type game machine), it is configured to be able to execute an effect (long open suggestion effect) suggesting the opening mode of the big winning hole (especially the second big winning hole C20). However, it is not limited to this, and a general gaming machine (for example, a type in which whether or not to move to the probability variation gaming state is determined according to the type of the jackpot pattern, or the probability variation gaming state continues until the next jackpot type game machine), it is possible to execute a performance (performance equivalent to the first long opening suggesting performance and the second long opening suggesting performance) that notifies that the probability variable jackpot will be won if a big win is achieved during the performance. may be configured. In addition, an effect suggesting the number of openings of the big winning opening (the so-called maximum number of rounds) in the special game executed when a big win is achieved during the effect (that is, if a big win is achieved during the effect, a 15-round big win In that case, the effect of notifying that if a big hit occurs during the production, the probability variable jackpot will be obtained, and the big hit will be achieved during the production. It may be configured so that an effect informing that a 15-round big hit will occur simultaneously {that is, if both effects are occurring simultaneously, a big hit will occur during the effect. If so, the purpose is to notify that the probability variable jackpot and 15 rounds jackpot will be announced, so the image for the effect may be a separate one, or the effect to notify that the probability variable jackpot will be the first image. (For example, a red background image), Effect for notifying that 15 rounds will be a big hit = 2nd image (e.g., yellow background image), Effect for notifying that it will be a probability variable big hit and 15 rounds of big win = 3rd image ( For example, a gold background image) may be configured to display a separate image when the notification conditions overlap}. In addition, when executing the effect of notifying the number of rounds in the special game, the number of executed rounds (the number of rounds including both the rounds in which the big winning opening is long and short) is notified. Alternatively, only the rounds in which the big prize opening is open for a long time = the actual number of rounds may be reported. In addition, as described above, an effect that notifies that if a big hit is achieved during the effect, it will be a variable probability big win (or that a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 will be executed), and during the effect If a big hit is achieved, a maximum round (for example, 15 rounds) jackpot will be announced, and by configuring the effect to occur simultaneously, if a big win occurs during the production, a probability variable big hit will occur (or , that a big hit with easy entry into the specific area C22 will be executed), a big hit will occur during the execution of the performance, and the number of rounds will not be fixed, but a variable hit will be achieved. On the other hand, during the execution of the performance that informs that the maximum round (for example, 15 rounds) jackpot will be achieved if the big win is achieved during the performance, the probability is changed by the big win during the performance of the performance. Thus, it is possible to create a gaming machine having two game features such that it is not determined whether or not the game is a big hit, but it is determined that the maximum round (15 rounds) is a big win. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, if there are a plurality of types of jackpots with different maximum round numbers (for example, 10 round jackpot and 15 round jackpot), the jackpot with the largest number of maximum rounds (for example, 15 round jackpot) round jackpot), it may be configured so that there is a possibility of both a variable probability jackpot and a non-variable probability jackpot, and in the case of a jackpot with the largest number of rounds (for example, a 15-round jackpot), it is considered a variable probability jackpot. It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of winning is higher than the possibility of winning a non-probable variable jackpot.

In addition, in a gaming machine of a type in which whether or not to shift to the probability varying gaming state is determined according to the type of the jackpot symbol, a further modified example can be given. More specifically, the types of jackpots on the first main game side = "variable probability jackpot and 15 rounds (the big winning opening is long open in all rounds) jackpot", "variable probability jackpot and real 5 rounds jackpot (first half For 5 rounds, the big prize mouth is long open, while the big prize mouth is short for the latter 10 rounds. 15 rounds in which the big prize opening is long in the first 5 rounds, while the big prize opening is short in the latter 10 rounds. Jackpot)”, “Non-variable jackpot and 5 rounds (big win opening is long open for all rounds) jackpot”, and the type of jackpot on the second main game side = “Variable jackpot and 15 rounds ( The big prize mouth is long open in all rounds) Big hit ", "A sure hit and a real 10 round big hit (the big prize mouth is long open in the first half of the 10 rounds, while the second half is a big prize in the 5 rounds. 15 rounds jackpot with short mouth opening)”, “Variable jackpot and 5 rounds (large winning mouth opens long in all rounds) jackpot”, “Non-variable jackpot and 15 rounds (large in all rounds)” The winning opening is long open) Jackpot", "Indeterminate variable jackpot and real 10 rounds jackpot (the big winning opening is long open in the first half of the 10 rounds, while the big winning opening is short in the second half of the 5 rounds. 15-round jackpot)”, and “non-probable variable jackpot and 5-round jackpot (big win opening is long open in all rounds)”. In this case, for example, when the jackpot occurs on the first main game side, when the fact that the maximum number of rounds = 15 rounds is correctly notified, the time when the 6th round with the big prize opening long open is executed. While the transition to the probability variable gaming state is definite in appearance, when the 6th round is executed in which the big winning opening is briefly opened, or when the 6th round is not executed and the jackpot ends, The transition to the probability variable gaming state is not definite in appearance. Therefore, if this setting is utilized, at the time when the sixth round in which the large winning opening is long opened is executed, the player is clearly notified of whether or not the transition to the probability variation gaming state is possible, or the large winning opening When the 6th round in which the game is opened for a long time is not executed, the player is not clearly notified of whether or not to shift to the probability variable game state (or is clearly notified as a so-called promotion performance). By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. However, as shown in the present example, when a big hit occurs on the first main game side with "an effect to inform that the probability variable big win will occur if the big win is achieved during the relevant effect", before the start of the big win Since the player has already been clearly notified of whether or not the transition to the probability variable gaming state is possible, whether or not to execute notification regarding whether or not to transition to the probability variable gaming state during such a big hit is appropriately switched. It would be desirable to configure it so that In addition, regarding the "effect to notify that a 15-round big hit will occur if a big hit occurs during the relevant effect", "actually a 5-round big hit" 15 rounds jackpot with a short opening for the rounds) and "Real 10 rounds jackpot (10 rounds in the first half have a long opening, while the 5 rounds in the second half have a short opening. It is desirable to configure so that it will not be executed when a 15-round jackpot that opens the game is generated (because there is a risk that the player will perceive it as a false notification).

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, if the first long opening suggesting image, it is mainly when the first suggesting effect trigger is being held, etc., and if it is the second long opening suggesting image, it is mainly when the short opening big hit occurs. etc. (that is, timing according to the progress of the game), the long opening suggesting effect is terminated by erasing these images, but the present invention is not limited to this. In particular, whether or not the long opening suggesting effect should be terminated when power failure/recovery of the gaming machine occurs during the period in which the first long opening suggesting image and the second long opening suggesting image are displayed. option arises. Therefore, an example of the case where attention is paid to such a case will be referred to as Modified Example 1 from the present embodiment, and only the modified points will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 25 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, the changes from this embodiment are in steps 2010 (variant 1), step 2012 (variant 1), and step 2013 (variant 1). It is to memorize whether or not the long opening suggestion effect is executed at the time (in a process described later, the power failure time is derived from the power failure occurrence time and the power failure recovery time). That is, when the power failure signal is received, in step 2010 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the real time clock RTC and acquires (latches) the RTC value. Next, in step 2012 (Variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores the acquired RTC value in the save area as the RTC value at power failure (power failure time). Next, in step 2013 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores the game-related information (information related to the progress of the game, such as the first suggestion effect flag and the second suggestion effect flag) in the retreat area. , go to step 2016 .

Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of initial processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 of FIG. 25 in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, steps 2060 (variant 1) to step 2068 (variant 1) are different from the present embodiment. It is constituted so as to restore execution/non-execution of the long opening suggesting effect at the time of occurrence. That is, if Yes in step 2056, in other words, if various information commands are received from the main control board M side, in step 2060 (transformation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the real-time clock RTC. , acquires (latches) the RTC value. Next, in step 2062 (variant 1), the sub-main control unit SM compares the acquired RTC value (current time of recovery from power failure) with the RTC value at power failure stored in the save area. A power failure time value (RTC value at power failure recovery - RTC value at power failure) is derived. Next, in step 2064 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the derived power interruption time value is a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) and It is a value intended to distinguish whether it is a power outage time or a power outage time from the end of business hours of the game arcade to the start of the next business). If Yes in step 2064 (variant 1), that is, if the power has been cut off for the predetermined time or longer (and various information commands instead of RAM clear information have been received from the main control board M side), step 2066 ( In variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the long-time power interruption flag, and proceeds to step 2068 (variation 1). On the other hand, if No in step 2064 (variant 1), that is, if the power outage lasted less than 10 minutes, the long-time power outage flag is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2068 (variant 1). Next, in step 2068 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the information (the first suggesting effect flag, the second suggesting effect flag, information relating to the progress of the game, etc.) stored in the retreat area. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step 2002).

Next, FIG. 27 is a flow chart of the first suggestive effect execution control process related to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 25 in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, the changes from this embodiment are about step 2201 (variant 1) and step 2227 (variant 1), and the purpose is to prevent the above-mentioned power failure for a long time (for example, 10 minutes or longer). In the case of , the long opening suggesting effect that has been executed at the time of power failure is terminated. That is, at the start of execution of the subroutine, in step 2201 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the long-time power interruption flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2201 (variant 1), the process moves to step 2202 and the same processing as in the present embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if No in step 2201 (variant 1), in step 2227 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the long-time power failure flag, proceeds to step 2228, and performs the same operation as in the present embodiment. Processing (processing for ending the first suggestion effect) is executed.

Next, FIG. 28 is a flow chart of the second suggestive effect execution control process relating to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 25 in Modification 1 from the present embodiment. First, the changes from this embodiment are about step 2301 (variant 1) and step 2319 (variant 1), and the purpose is to prevent the above-mentioned power failure for a long time (for example, 10 minutes or more). In the case of , the long opening suggesting effect that has been executed at the time of power failure is terminated. That is, at the start of execution of the subroutine, in step 2301 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the long time power interruption flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2301 (variant 1), the process moves to step 2302 and the same processing as in the present embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if No in step 2301 (variant 1), in step 2319 (variant 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the long-time power interruption flag, proceeds to step 2320, and performs the same operation as in the present embodiment. Processing (processing for ending the second suggestion effect) is executed.

By making the changes as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the present embodiment, the time elapsed from the occurrence of the power failure until the power is turned on again is longer than the predetermined time (10 minutes in this example). In some cases (especially when the RAM is not cleared), the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect (effects suggesting the possibility of a long open jackpot) that were being executed at the time of the power failure occurred will be changed at the time of the power failure recovery. configured to terminate. By configuring in this way, for example, when the power is cut off due to the end of business of the game hall and the power is turned on again due to the start of business, it is possible to prevent the long opening suggesting effect from being executed from the start of the game. can be done. In particular, in the second long opening suggesting image, "an image notifying that if a jackpot is won while the image is displayed, the probability variable jackpot" will be displayed even if there is no unspent pending or the game state is a game. Even in the normal game state, which is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to continue to display it, even if the power is cut off due to the closing of the business of the game hall or the power is turned on again due to the start of business. It is possible to keep displaying continuously. However, at the start of the business, if "an image notifying that if you win a big hit while displaying the image, you will win a variable probability" is displayed, new players who come after the start of the business (in other words, (For example, a player who is likely to be different from the player who was playing at the time of power failure), even though the situation is not particularly advantageous for the player, it is announced that the situation is advantageous for the player. As a result, there is a risk of unfairly attracting customers at the start of business, so in the situation where it is assumed that the business is about to start, the second long opening suggestion image was displayed at the time of power failure. However, it is desirable to delete it properly. On the other hand, if the time elapsed from the occurrence of the power failure until the power is turned on again is less than the predetermined time (10 minutes in this example), in other words, the power failure time during maintenance of the gaming machine during business hours of the game arcade. and when it is presumed that the same player is still playing the game, when the second long opening suggestion image is displayed at the time of power failure, the power If it is not configured so that it can be displayed again at the time of power failure and recovery, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the power failure has triggered the loss of the chance of winning a definite variable jackpot. When the time elapsed until the power is turned on again is less than a predetermined time (10 minutes in this example), the second long opening suggesting image is restored and redisplayed when the power is restored. That's why.

In addition, the configuration of the display mode of the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect may be changed as appropriate, for example, a situation where the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are not executed In the probability variation gaming state), when the game is not executed for a predetermined time (eg, 1 minute) (when the ball is not entered into the entrance and the symbol variation is not executed), the demo screen is displayed (eg, the game (moving image display for introducing the characters appearing on the machine to the player), while the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are being executed, the time during which the game is not executed continues. Even if it does, it may be configured so as not to shift to the demonstration screen display.

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
Further, in the above embodiment, in the firing position notification control process, the notification image is displayed using four layers in the display control, but this is only an example and is not limited to this. It is also possible to reduce the processing load by reducing it. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is referred to as Modified Example 2 from the present embodiment, and only the modified points will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 16 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is about steps 2730 (variant 2) to step 2746 (variant 2), the purpose of which is to reduce the number of display layers to be used and reduce the processing load. That is, in the case of Yes in step 2702 (in the time reduction game state), in step 2730 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the second notification image on the second layer in the display control. set command.

Here, as shown in the lower part of the image diagram on the right side of the same figure, only three display layers are provided in Modification Example 2 from the present embodiment.

Next, at step 2732 (Variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the symbol-fluctuation flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2732 (variant 2), in step 2734 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the decorative pattern display layer to be the third layer (backmost display layer) (first notification image becomes the first layer), and the process proceeds to step 2738 (variant 2). On the other hand, if No in step 2732 (variant 2) (if the pattern is stopped), in step 2736 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the decorative pattern display layer to the first layer (the frontmost display layer). layer) (the layer on which the first notification image can be displayed is the third layer), and the process proceeds to step 2738 (variant 2).

Next, in step 2738 (variation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it has newly received the first main game start entrance ball detection command. If Yes in step 2738 (variant 2), in step 2740 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a layer capable of displaying the first notification image (decorative pattern display layer and second notification image display layer). A command to display the first notification image is set in the first layer or the third layer), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2020). On the other hand, if No in step 2738 (variant 2), the process proceeds to the next process (step 2020 process).

Further, if No in step 2714, in other words, if it is not in the time reduction game state and not in the special game state (it is not in the right-handed state), in step 2742 (transformation 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S , It is determined whether or not a new second main game start entrance ball detection command has been received. If Yes in step 2742 (variant 2), in step 2746 (variant 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the left notification image in the first layer in display control, and performs the next process ( processing of step 2020). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2742 (variant 2), in step 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not it has newly received an auxiliary game start entrance ball detection command. If Yes in step 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to step 2746 (second). If No in 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020).

Here, the left notification image is, as shown in the image diagram of FIG. This is an image for instructing to print out

By making the changes as described above, according to the gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the present embodiment, in the progress of the game, it is possible to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30. It is desirable to adjust the intensity and launch the game ball) (in this example, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is easy to enter the first main game start port A10, so the non-time reduction game During and during a non-special game), the entry to the ball entrance provided on the right side of the game area D30 (in this example, especially the auxiliary game start hole H10 and the second main game start hole B10) is detected. In this case, an image instructing the player to hit to the left can be displayed, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and not only can these listed concepts be combined or separated (generalized concepts), but also concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. may

(Second embodiment)
In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the big winning opening, the game state shifts to the probability variable game state, and the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state are entered a predetermined number of times. In the gaming machine constructed to The playability of the gaming machine capable of executing the effect is not limited to this. As a second embodiment of a gaming machine having other game features capable of executing the effect, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 30 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. A difference from the present embodiment is that a general winning opening P10 is provided on the right side of the game area D30 from the player's point of view and below the right side of the first big winning opening C10. Thus, among the game balls that have flowed down the right side of the game area D30 and that have flowed down in the vicinity of the second big winning opening C20 and the first big winning opening C10, the second big winning opening C20 and the first big winning opening C10 A game ball that did not enter the special winning hole C10 can enter the general winning hole P10. In addition, on the left side of the game area D30 as viewed from the player, at the upstream position of the path of the game ball that can flow down to the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10- 2 is further provided. In this way, even when the player executes either "right-handed" or "left-handed", the ball enters (passes) any of the auxiliary game start openings H10-1 (H10-2). As a result, by operating the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, the game ball can enter the second main game starter B10. In addition, a launch instruction display section HS is provided in the lower left part of the center decoration D38. Here, the shooting instruction display section HS consists of two lamps, and when the lamp on the right side (right-handed display section HSR) is lit, it is in a state of recommending the player to hit "right-handed". When the lamp (left-handed display section HSL) is lit, it indicates that the player is recommended to play left-handed. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, one speaker D24 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the game lamp D26 provided on the upper part of the game board D35. It's becoming It should be noted that the installation positions and aspects thereof are not limited to this example.

Next, FIG. 31 is a main flow chart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 1050 (second) and step 1800 (second). The unit control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1100 . Also, in step 1600, after the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game control process, in step 1800 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small winning game control process described later, Go to step 1910 . The number of prize balls paid out in the process of step 1910 is the first main game start opening A10: 4 balls, the second main game start opening B10: 3 balls, and the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20). : 15 balls, general prize gate P10: 3 balls. Further, in step 1014, regarding various information commands to be transmitted to the sub-control board S side, after the command related to the time saving number counter value is transmitted, the command for restoring the display of the first to fourth notification images (fire instruction command) is transmitted.

Next, FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the firing instruction display section control process according to the subroutine of step 1050 (second) in FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is ON. If Yes at step 1052, at step 1056, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the left-handed display section HSL of the firing instruction display section HS, and lights up the right-handed display section HSR. On the other hand, if No at step 1052, at step 1054, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1054, in step 1058, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the right-handed display section HSR of the firing instruction display section HS, lights up the left-handed display section HSL, and proceeds to the next process (step 1100). process). If No in step 1054, the process proceeds to step 1056, that is, the left-handed display unit HSL is turned off, the right-handed display unit HSR is turned on, and the next process (step 1100) is performed. . Thus, in the launch instruction display unit HS, if the main game time reduction flag is on (that is, if the current game state is the time reduction game state) or if the special game execution flag is on (special game is being executed), the right-handed display part HSR is lit to display the recommendation to the player to "right-handed". If the game is not being executed, the left-handed display section HSL is lit to display a message recommending "left-handed" to the player. In addition, it is not limited to this, and as one firing instruction display unit HS is provided, depending on whether it is lit or not, depending on the color of light when it is lit, or lighting of the firing instruction display unit HS such as blinking Depending on the mode, a configuration may be adopted in which a recommended instruction of “right-handed” or “left-handed” is presented to the player. Furthermore, immediately before the end of the state in which "right-handed" and "left-handed" are recommended (for example, the time-reduced game state in which "right-handed" is recommended), the lighting mode, the lighting color, etc. are changed. By doing so, the player can be notified in advance that the state in which "right-handed" or "left-handed" is recommended ends. Furthermore, when the control related to the game state of the gaming machine is different, the situation in which the player should hit to the right is not whether or not the main game side is in the time reduction game state, but whether it is in the probability fluctuation state or not, and whether or not the special game is executed. In the case of a state that should be controlled in connection with another flag such as during operation of the electric accessory (during the opening of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) as well as inside, it is appropriately determined for right hitting. It is conceivable to change the type and number of flags to be used.

Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is about the lottery table for determining the auxiliary game stop symbol in the lower right of the figure, and during the non-time shortening game state and the time shortening game state, at the time of winning the auxiliary game symbol The opening modes of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d are different for each of the stop symbols "D1 and D2". Specifically, in the non-time shortening game state, when "D1" is stopped as the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, the open mode is (open for 0.2 seconds→closed). Further, when "D2" stops, the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds→close for 0.8 seconds→open for 5 seconds→close). On the other hand, when "D1" is stopped in the time reduction game state, the opening mode is (open for 1 second→close for 1 second→open for 2 seconds→close for 1 second→open for 2.2 seconds→close). Also, when "D2" stops, the opening mode is (open for 1.2 seconds→close for 0.8 seconds→open for 4 seconds→close).

Next, FIG. 34 is a flow chart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the requirement of satisfaction of the fluctuation start condition related to the determination of step 1403. It is an additional requirement for fulfillment. Further differences are step 1412 (second), step 1550 (second), step 1414 (second) and step 1750 (second), and steps 1434 (second) to step 1438 (second). ), that is, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbols for the main game symbols based on the main game side random numbers and the lottery results (see main game table 2). At step 1412 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency A flag (the flag that is turned on in the limited frequency A state) is on. If Yes at step 1412 (second), at step 1550 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency A variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1415 . On the other hand, if No in step 1412 (second), in step 1414 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limited frequency B flag (the flag that is turned on in the limited frequency B state) is on. determine whether If Yes at step 1414 (second), at step 1750 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a limited frequency B variation mode determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1415 .

Here, the main game table 2 shown in FIG. 35 is an example of the first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41-B). As shown in this figure, in the second embodiment, there are provided seven kinds of stop symbols at the time of the jackpot on the first main game side and six kinds of stop symbols on the second main game side. The symbols are sorted according to differences in five elements. The five elements are the number of rounds with balls (the number of long open rounds), the number of actual rounds (the number of all rounds to be executed, and the number of rounds including both long open rounds and short open rounds. Yes, sometimes referred to as the number of execution rounds), whether or not to transition to the probability variable game state after the special game ends, whether or not to transition to the time reduction game state after the special game ends, and the time reduction granted after the special game ends number of times. When the second main game wins the jackpot, the time-reducing game state is always entered after the special game ends, and there are a plurality of jackpot patterns related to the jackpot with a relatively low expected value for winning prize balls in the jackpot. configured to exist. It should be noted that the big hit (the actual number of rounds is "7") related to the stop symbol "9A" has the number of rounds with balls paid out of "6". Aspect pattern {For example, even if game balls are continuously shot during the round, a predetermined number of game balls, which is the end condition, is difficult to enter. ) is repeated three times (but there is no closing time for the third time)}, even if the opening state of the big winning opening during the execution of the first round or the small winning in the big winning is visually recognized, it is a small winning. Since it is difficult to determine whether it is a variable probability big hit or not, it is configured to be able to execute a reverse variable probability transition effect described later. In this case, in the subsequent 6 rounds (rounds after the 2nd round) after the big win related to "9A", the big winning hole is opened in the long opening pattern so that it is possible to get the ball. In addition, after the end of the big hit, it is configured so as not to shift to the time shortening game state, so if you continue to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole, after the end of the big hit, the probability fluctuation game state and non It shifts to a time-reduced game state (sometimes referred to as latent probability change).

In addition, in the case of No in step 1414 (second), in step 1410-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the main game table 3 and determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols. and go to step 1415 .

Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 36 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this figure, in the second embodiment, even when determining the variation mode related to the small winning symbol, the variation mode ( variation time). As a more preferable mode, even in the case of a big win, the lottery table for determining the variation mode to be referred to can be changed according to the type of the pattern, and the small winning pattern and the big winning pattern corresponding to "9A" are the same. It is preferable to refer to the variation mode determination lottery table.

Also, at step 1430, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is not a jackpot symbol, at step 1434 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the main game symbol It is determined whether or not the stop pattern of is a small hit pattern. In the case of Yes in step 1434 (second), in step 1436 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag and proceeds to the processing of step 1450 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1434 (second), in step 1438 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a launch instruction command, which is information for instructing the player to launch a game ball. is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930), and the next processing (processing of step 1500) transition to In the second embodiment, the execution timing of the specific game end determination process of step 1450 is different from that of the present embodiment. there is

Next, FIG. 37 is a flow chart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 (second) of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 {a counter (decrement counter) that is decremented for each change when the limited frequency A flag is ON} to It is determined whether or not it is a continuous stimulating performance execution value (a counter value related to the number of times of shortening the time to execute the performance of stimulating whether the time shortening game state continues, in this example, 41, 21, 1). In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A-1, and based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol. and go to step 1558 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, in step 1556, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A-2, and based on the main game side random numbers and the lottery result, the variation mode (variation time) and go to step 1558 . The setting of the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency A counter shown here is triggered by the stoppage of the jackpot symbols "2A", "2B", "4A", "4B", "6A" and "6B". A process is executed in which the flag is turned on and the value of the time saving frequency is set according to the pattern.

Next, at step 1558, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts (decrements) 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1. Next, at step 1560, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is zero. If Yes at step 1560 , at step 1562 the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag and proceeds to step 1564 . On the other hand, if step 1560 is No, the process proceeds to step 1564 as well. Next, in step 1564, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a limited frequency A command (a command to the sub-control board S side, determined by referring to the limited frequency table A-1 or the limited frequency table A-2). A command relating to the fluctuation time associated with the main game symbol that has been received) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control section SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1415). In addition, in the aspect shown in FIG. 37 in the second embodiment, when the value of the limited frequency counter is a predetermined value (continuous fan effect execution value), the limited frequency table A-1 is referred to. Even if 1552 is YES, it is also possible to use different tables such as limited frequency tables A-1, A-1' and A-1'' according to the value of the limited frequency A counter.

Next, FIG. 38 is a flow chart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B, and based on the main game side random number, the lottery result, and the stop symbols related to the main game symbols, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbols. is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1754 . Next, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 {a counter (decrement counter) that is decremented for each symbol variation when the limited frequency B flag is ON}. 1 is subtracted (decremented) from Next, at step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is zero. If Yes at step 1756 , at step 1758 the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency B flag and proceeds to step 1760 . On the other hand, if No in step 1756, the process proceeds to step 1760 as well. Next, at step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a limited frequency B command (a command to the sub-control board S side, which is the variation time of the main game symbols determined by referring to the limited frequency table B). command) is set (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1415).

Next, FIG. 39 shows an example of a limited frequency table A-1, a limited frequency table A-2, and a limited frequency table B according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is a continuation enable/disable value (non-probability variation game state and time reduction game state, variation that may end the time reduction game state In this example, the limited frequency table A-1 is referred to when 41, 21, 1), and the limited frequency table A-2 is selected when the counter value is not a continuation permission value. It is configured. As shown in the figure, the fluctuation time at the time of failure when referring to the limited frequency table A-2 is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time at the time of failure when referring to the limited frequency table A-1. is configured to be In other words, when the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is a continuation allowable value (41, 21, 1 in this example), if the result of the win or fail of the main game pattern is a loss, the fluctuation The time period is relatively long, and it is constructed so as to secure the execution time of the fanning effect as to whether or not the time-reduced game state continues.

Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1451 (second), that is, in step 1451 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the main game probability variation flag is off. judge. If Yes in step 1451 (second), the process proceeds to step 1462 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1451 (second), in other words, if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, without performing the processing of steps 1462 to 1470, the next processing (processing of step 1500) is shifted to. do. Thus, in the second embodiment, unlike the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state does not end depending on the number of pattern variations. It is configured so that at least the probability variation game state is not terminated until the next big win is won. It should be noted that step 1451 (second) does not provide the determination process, if the control to the probability variation gaming state, the maximum value (for example, the maximum value of 2 bytes 65535) or 10000 times to the time-saving number counter It is also possible to set it as a mode that substantially guarantees a big hit until the next time.

Next, FIG. 41 is a flow chart of the special game operation condition determination process of step 1500 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1514 (second) and step 1516 (second), that is, in step 1508, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time saving number counter MP52c to zero, At step 1514 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 and the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1516 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 1510 .

Next, FIG. 42 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, differences from this embodiment are steps 1611 (second), 1625 (second), step 1628 (second), step 1632 (second), step 1700 (second), and step 1645 (second). 2) In addition, a gaming machine (ball confirmation In other words, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M set a special game start display instruction command (command to the sub control board S side). After that, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a firing instruction command (a command set at the start of a special game, whether to execute left-handed or right-handed) at the start of the special game. (command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1616. Also, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20) and starts the opening timer, and then in step 1625 (second), the main control board The CPUMC of M is a launch instruction command at the start of a round, which will be described later (a command set at the start of a round in each round, and includes information on whether to execute left-handed or right-handed). command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1626. Also, in step 1626, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the game state information command (command to the sub control board S side) relating to the special game, in step 1628 (second), the main control board M CPUMC determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes have been won in the first (second) grand prize opening C10 (C20). In the case of Yes at step 1628 (second), at step 1632 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20), and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1628 (second), in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks whether the open timer has reached a predetermined time (for example, 29.0 seconds in the long open pattern). judge. If Yes at step 1630, the process proceeds to step 1632 (second). On the other hand, if No at step 1630, the next process {step 1800 (second)} is performed. Also, at step 1644, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the sub control board S side), at step 1700 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M , a game state determination process after the end of a special game, which will be described later, is executed. Next, at step 1645 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a firing instruction command (a command set at the end of the special game, whether to execute left-handed or right-handed) at the end of the special game. (Command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the next process {Step 1800 (second)} is performed. By configuring in this way, in a gaming machine in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the big hit based on the big hit pattern, a launch instruction command (game This is a command related to information for informing the player of the recommended shooting direction, and the command to the sub control board S side) is set, and information related to the instruction display of the shooting position to the player is sent to the sub control board S side. By transmitting the information, the sub-control board S side executes an appropriate shooting instruction presentation according to the game state at the timing when the shooting direction recommended for the player is switched from left to right or vice versa. It will be possible. An example of the opening pattern of the round in step 1618 is a short opening pattern A in which "open for 1.8 seconds→close for 0.5" is repeated three times (the closing time after the last opening is not provided. ), a short opening pattern B that performs “1.8 seconds open → 0.2 closing” only once (no closing time after the last opening), and a long opening pattern “29.0 seconds Long open pattern A (open → closed) (no closing time after the last open), long open pattern “1.8 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed → 28.0 seconds open → closed” B (the closing time after the last opening is not provided), and the like.

FIG. 43 shows an example of the contents of the launch instruction command {command set in step 1625 (second) processing} at the start of the round in the second embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, "MODE data" and "EVENT data" corresponding to "instruction contents" are listed, and the contents thereof are as follows. Note that "○○H" and "○○○○B" in the following notation indicate hexadecimal notation and binary notation, respectively.
Short open pattern A: 9CH, 04H (00000100B)
Short open pattern B: 9CH, 06H (00000110B)
Long open pattern A: 9CH, 05H (00000101B)
Long open pattern B: 9CH, 07H (00000111B)

Here, "MODE data" is data representing the type of command (for example, a launch instruction command at the start of a special game, a launch instruction command at the start of a round, a launch instruction command at the end of a special game, etc.). "9CH" indicates that it is a launch instruction command at the start of the round. On the other hand, the "EVENT data" is, for example, as shown in the lower part of the same figure, three-digit numbers of "0" and "1" (in three bits), the content of the command (firing instruction mode, big prize opening). opening patterns, etc.). More specifically, in order from the highest digit among the three digits, digit (1): "0" represents information related to left-handed shooting, "1" represents information related to right-handed shooting, and digit (2). : "0" represents the opening pattern of the large winning opening pattern A, "1" represents information related to the opening pattern B as the opening pattern of the large winning opening, and the digit of (3): "0" represents the large winning prize. The information indicates that the mouth is opened in a short opening pattern, and "1" indicates that the big winning opening is opened in a long opening pattern. As a specific example, the command content (06H) when the bit string for identifying the opening pattern of the "EVENT data" is "110B" is a state in which a right-handed firing mode is recommended, and a large winning opening This represents information that the release pattern is a short release pattern B (for example, a release pattern in which "open for 1.8 seconds → open for 0.2 seconds" is performed only once). It should be noted that the invention is not limited to this example, and in the case of 2-byte data as described below, it is possible to transmit more detailed information about the launch instruction mode, the pattern for opening the big winning opening, and the like.

Here, the command sent from the main control board M to the sub-control board S in the game machine is generally composed of 2-byte data. Among them, one byte is "MODE data" and the other byte is "EVENT data". The most significant bit of each is a bit (identification bit) for distinguishing between "MODE data" and "EVENT data", so the remaining 7 bits are practically used as a data area. The Rukoto.

It should be noted that an example of the launch instruction command shown in FIG. , etc., may be prepared. In such a configuration, a launch instruction command relating to the game state may be provided such that the EVENT data "00H" is the game state in which the player should hit to the left, and "01H" indicates the game state in which the player should hit to the right. . Here, the advantage of providing a command that indicates the recommended firing position in the left and right direction with only EVENT data "00H" and "01H" is that each flag such as the main game probability change flag, the main game time reduction flag, the auxiliary game time reduction flag, etc. From among them, it is possible to use the information indicating that the flag is on (the state where "01H" is stored in the RWM storage area) as the event data as it is as the information indicating that the right hand should be beaten. is mentioned. In addition, by doing so, if it is recommended to hit to the right when any one of the plurality of flags related to the game state is turned on, the result of the OR operation of each flag can be used as the EVENT data. This makes it possible to avoid complication of the process of determining whether or not each flag is ON by the number of flags.

In the second embodiment, the following aspect is also possible.
(1) As described above, when detailed information can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side as a launch instruction command, a plurality of opening patterns (a plurality of times, executing short and long opening in one round, etc.), the information related to the plurality of opening patterns is transmitted to the sub control board S side by making the content of the firing instruction command different. be able to. As an example, the opening pattern information of each round is specified as an offset value by the information of the upper bits, and in the least significant bit, "odd number" → long open, "even number" → short open. On the side of the sub-control board S, it is possible to distinguish between short open and long open by the information of the least significant bit. In addition, in the case where it is possible to distinguish between the short open pattern and the long open pattern by the least significant bit, there are three types of long open patterns, long open patterns A to C, and short open patterns are short open patterns. When four types of open patterns A to D are provided, since the number of types of short open patterns is greater than the number of types of long open patterns, the difference "4 types - 3 types = 1" length is required. A dummy command (a command whose least significant bit is an odd number) corresponding to the release pattern may be provided. Further, by combining two or more types of commands, the content of the firing instruction may be identified, or the number of types of firing instruction commands corresponding to all combination patterns may be provided. If it is decided to provide a firing instruction command in one-to-one correspondence with all patterns, even within one round, an instruction related to short opening (for example, notification in a passive manner such as turning black and white or erasing the instruction ) and an instruction related to long opening (for example, notification in a positive mode such as emitting light or accompanied by sound) can be switched.
(2) In the above-described configuration, the main control board M side generates the firing instruction command, and the sub control board S side executes effects such as firing instruction display based on the content specified in the firing instruction command. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, and information from the main control board M side on the sub control board S side (current game state, special game execution start command, big hit pattern, opening command for each round, etc. ), the mode of the effect such as the shooting instruction display may be determined, and the effect may be executed by the effect display device SG.
(3) In addition, when the large winning opening is opened multiple times (short opening or long opening) within one round, the main control board M can transmit the launch instruction command multiple times within the round. Only when the sub-control board S side receives an instruction command related to the long opening of the big prize opening, a positive mode of notification (enlarging the display area, emitting light strongly, executing separate display, voice ) may be configured to execute. For example, the instruction command is the opening mode of the big prize opening executed within one round, "1" → open for 29 seconds, "2" → open for 0.4 seconds, "3" → open for 2 seconds". In the corresponding case, if one round is an open pattern such as "open for 0.4 seconds → close for 0.4 seconds → open for 0.4 seconds → close for 0.4 seconds → open for 2 seconds → close", respectively , the launch instruction commands "2", "2", and "3" are transmitted to the sub-control board S side.
(4) In addition to the opening time of the big prize opening, when multiple types of closing time are provided (for example, "1 second", "4 seconds", "6 seconds", etc.), the time related to the closing may also be transmitted from the main control board M side as a firing instruction command. In the case of such a configuration, for the relatively long closing time of "4 seconds" and "6 seconds", "waiting to open", "X seconds left to open", etc. may be displayed by the effect display device SG. By configuring in this way, in order to correspond to the time of the performance executed during the big win, even if the closing time of the big winning hole between rounds is set to a long time, the state where the big winning hole does not open ( That is, in a disadvantageous state in which the number of paid balls does not increase, it is possible to notify the player not to uselessly shoot game balls. Also, the launch instruction command may be configured to be set at the end of the round (when the open timer value is 0 or when a predetermined number of prizes are won in the big prize opening).
(5) In addition, commands regarding the recommended launch position during the big win may also be sent in binary, and the sub-control board S side may process them so as to match the timing in each round according to the type of the big win. .

FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1700 (second) in FIG. 42 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1728-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a probability variable jackpot symbol (a stop symbol pertaining to a jackpot that shifts to the probability variable game state after the jackpot is over, and this example 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B) is determined. In the case of Yes at step 1728-1, at step 1728-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1728-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol without time reduction (a stop symbol pertaining to a jackpot that does not shift to the time-reduction gaming state after the jackpot ends, and in this example, 9A). In the case of Yes in step 1728-3, in step 1728-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (65535 in this example) to the time saving number counter MP52c. Here, by setting a sufficiently large value as the predetermined value A, it is possible to have a structure in which the probability variation game state is substantially continued until the next big hit. In addition, according to the configuration of FIG. 40, when the game state is the probability variation game state, the time saving counter MP52c is not subtracted, so the predetermined value A set here may be any value (predetermined value (Even if A is not set), the probability variation game state continues until the next big hit.

Next, in step 1728-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a battle loss probability variable jackpot symbol (a stop symbol pertaining to a jackpot that shifts to the probability variable game state after the jackpot is completed, It is determined whether or not it is a big win in which the performance of losing to the battle performance during the big win is executed, and in this example, it is 3B). If Yes at step 1728-5, at step 1728-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 to a predetermined value (60 in this example). Next, at step 1728-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag, and proceeds to step 1728-11. On the other hand, if step 1728-5 is No, the process also proceeds to step 1728-11. Also, if No in step 1728-1, that is, if the stop symbol of the main game symbol is 2A, 4A, 6A, 2B, 4B, or 6B, in step 1728-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M , The number of times of time reduction (20 times for 2A/2B, 40 times for 4A/4B, 60 times for 6A/6B) based on the jackpot pattern is set in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1728-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the same value (in this example, 20 times, 40 times, or 60 times) as the number of times of time saving set in the time saving times counter MP52c. Set to -1. Next, at step 1728-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag, and proceeds to step 1728-11. Next, in steps 1728-11 and 1728-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time saving flag, turns on the auxiliary game time saving flag, and performs the next processing {step 1645 (second) processing}. Incidentally, even if No in 1728-3, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1645 (second) process}.

Next, FIG. 45 is a flow chart of small-hit game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1800 (second) in FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag. Next, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M selects an opening pattern related to the round (the small winning game) {preferably an opening pattern similar to the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of the short opening big win, for example , "open for 1.8 seconds→close for 0.5 seconds" is repeated three times (no closing time is set after the last opening), etc.). Next, at step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, at step 1809, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first big winning opening C10 and starts the small winning game opening timer. Next, at step 1810, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game start display instruction command (command to the sub control board S side). In addition, it is preferable that during the small winning game, the same effect as during the special game is executed. Next, in step 1811, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a launch instruction command (command to the sub side) at the start of the small winning game, and proceeds to step 1814. On the other hand, if No in step 1802, in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1812 , go to step 1814 .

Next, at step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prizes have been won in the first big prize winning opening C10. If Yes in step 1814 , go to step 1818 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1814, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the small winning game opening timer and sets a predetermined time (for example, "opening for 1.8 seconds → It is determined whether or not "0.5 seconds of closing" has been repeated three times. If Yes in step 1816 , go to step 1818 .

Next, at step 1818, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the driving of the first big prize winning port electric accessory C11d to close the first big prize winning port C10. Next, at step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the timer for the small hit game. Next, at step 1822, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag. Next, at step 1823, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the sub control board S side). Next, at step 1824, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a launch instruction command (command to the sub-control board S side) at the end of the small winning game. Next, at step 1825, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time saving flag is off. If Yes at step 1825, at step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag. Next, at step 1830, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency B counter to a predetermined number of times (10 in this example), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910). Note that even if No in step 1812, step 1816, or step 1825, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

In addition, after the end of the small winning game, on the condition that it is not a time shortening game state, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency B state, but it is not limited to this. Whether or not to shift to the limited frequency state may be differentiated according to the winning pattern. Also, as a big hit, for example, the number of rounds to be executed is two rounds, and the opening pattern of "open for 1.8 seconds → close for 0.5 seconds" is performed twice in the first round, and "open for 1.8 seconds" in the second round. ” is executed once (the closing time after the final opening of each round is not provided), and after the completion of the big win, a transition to the probability variable game state is provided, that is, the big win over two rounds in the big win The opening mode (opening and closing in appearance) of the winning opening is configured to be the same as the opening mode (opening and closing in appearance) of the big winning opening in the small winning, and the limited frequency state after the end of the big winning and after the ending of the small winning. It may be configured to be able to shift to By such a configuration, the player is configured so that the player cannot recognize which game state (whether it is a probability variable game state) at the time when the big win or the small win is finished, and the current state in the limited frequency state. By executing the effect of suggesting or announcing the game state of (1), it is possible to realize a game property in which the current game state is suggested during symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 46 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 2700 (second) and step 2750 (second), that is, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executed the special game-related display control process. After that, in step 1700 (second), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes firing position notification control processing, which will be described later. Next, in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes stay stage determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to the processing of step 2020 .

Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. In addition, in the second embodiment, the processing in the figure is common to both the processing related to the effect during the special game and the processing related to the effect during the small hit. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 2550 (second). In 2), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes special game effect execution processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2614 .

Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing relating to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. 47 in the second embodiment. First, at step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first main game side jackpot is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the battle execution jackpot pattern (the pattern pertaining to the jackpot in which the battle effect is executed during the jackpot, and in this example, 2A/3A).・Determine whether or not a jackpot related to 4A, 5A, 6A) is in progress. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the battle winning jackpot symbol (in the battle effect during the big win, the symbol pertaining to the big win in which the winning effect is executed. In this example, 3A · It is determined whether or not the jackpot related to 5A) is being executed. In the case of Yes at step 2556 , at step 2558 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to execute a battle victory presentation, and proceeds to step 2568 . On the other hand, if No in step 2554 (that is, if the symbols related to the jackpot being executed are 7A and 9A), in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays the time-saving and non-time-saving jackpot symbols (non-time It is a big hit pattern that shifts to the shortened game state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 9A). In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a reversal probability variable transition effect (for example, when the first round ends, a big hit or a small win ends on the effect display device SG). When you think that the effect will be executed and it will shift to the "empty stage", the screen display will explode, and after the effect is executed, the characters "Variable probability confirmed!" A command for executing a blessing effect for blessing the person is set, and the process proceeds to step 2568 . On the other hand, if No in step 2562 (that is, 7A in this example), in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a blessing effect (a effect to notify that the state will shift to the probability variable game state after the end of the special game). Set the command to be executed and go to step 2568 . In the case of No in step 2556, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in a state where the battle defeat effect (a state in which the shift to the probability variable game state after the special game is not notified) is performed. (It may be configured to execute the effect in the case of shifting to the probability variation gaming state and the case of shifting to the non-probability variation gaming state) is set, and the process proceeds to step 2568. Also, if No in step 2552 , the process proceeds to step 2568 .

Next, at step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second main game side jackpot is being executed. In the case of Yes at step 2568, at step 2570, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S selects a post-battle winning jackpot pattern (a jackpot pattern in which a post-battle winning effect is executed during the execution of a special game, and in this example, 5B. It is determined whether or not the jackpot related to 7B) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2570, in step 2572, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the effect after winning the battle (the effect that is executed during the jackpot on the second main game side that is won in the probability variable gaming state, and the jackpot A command for executing the effect of congratulating the player, which is executed when shifting to the probability variable gaming state after the end, is set, and the process proceeds to step 2576 . On the other hand, if No in step 2570, that is, if the jackpot symbols related to the jackpot that is being executed are 2B, 3B, 4B, and 6B, in step 2574, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs a post-battle defeat production (probability fluctuation It is an effect that is executed during the jackpot on the second main game side that is won in the game state, and is executed in both the case of shifting to the probability fluctuation game state and the case of shifting to the non-probability fluctuation game state after the end of the jackpot. For example, it displays ``Evening stage rush!'' If a special game end demo time is provided, it is possible to display ``Evening stage rush!'' at the end demo time). Set the command to be executed and go to step 2576 . On the other hand, if step 2568 is No, the process proceeds to step 2576 as well. Here, in the second embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, it is configured to notify the game state to be shifted after the winning big win is completed by the effect during the symbol variation related to the big winning symbol. , the battle production is executed during the pattern fluctuation time related to the big hit pattern, and if the battle production is won, after the big hit related to the big hit pattern is completed, the game state shifts to the probability variable gaming state, and if the battle production is lost, the big win is won. After the end of the jackpot related to the symbol, the game is shifted to a non-probability variation gaming state. In this way, since the player recognizes the game state after the end of the big win at the time the big win is executed, during the big win related to the big win symbols on the second main game side won in the probability variable game state, It is configured so as not to execute an effect that stirs up the game state to be shifted after the end of the big win. Next, at step 2576, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not a small win is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2576, in step 2578, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S displays a production during a small hit (a production executed during a small win, for example, entering an "empty stage"!). If an end demonstration time is set, a command to execute "Empty stage rush!" It should be noted that even if No in step 2576 , the process proceeds to step 2614 .

Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) in FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. First, at step 2747-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the content of the firing instruction command received from the main control board M side. Next, at step 2747-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the firing instruction command has contents related to hitting to the right. In the case of Yes at step 2747-2, at step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG. Here, the "notification image" is an effect that notifies the player of the game ball's recommended shooting direction, shooting intensity, and game area to be shot, and is mainly used when the game state (situation) changes. {At the start of the jackpot, at the time of transition to the game state, at the end of the jackpot, etc.}, for example, "Right hit", "Left hit", "Return to left hit", "Aim for the big prize opening", This is an image for notifying such as "Aim at V (specific area C22)". Next, at step 2747-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the second notification image on the effect display device SG.

In addition, as a specific example of the configuration related to other notification images that can be applied to this example, the right to start the big win can be temporarily held until the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, the big win pattern is stopped). After that, when the jackpot is not started until the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start hole H10), it is notified to shoot the game ball toward the specific area (for example, the auxiliary game start hole H10). may be configured to

Here, the configuration of the notification image according to this example will be described in detail.
(1) Among the notification images, the first notification image is an image displayed in the entire vicinity of the center of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. The first notification image (right shot) has a mode in which a right-pointing arrow is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG, and in a situation where the game should be played with left shot, it is easy to enter the ball by right shot. It is displayed by detecting a ball entering a ball opening (for example, a general prize winning opening) that is difficult to enter by left-handed hitting. In addition, the first notification image (left-handed) has a mode in which a left-pointing arrow is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is displayed by detecting a ball entering a ball entrance (for example, the first main game start hole) that is easy to enter and difficult to enter by hitting to the right. In addition, the first notification image shows the recommended firing position at the game state transition timing (especially when the recommended firing position is changed (from left to right, or from right to left, etc.) game state change timing) It plays a role of notifying, and the display is erased when a predetermined performance time elapses or when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied (this is a notification image that is not always displayed).
(2) Of the notification images, the second notification image is an image that is displayed in a strip shape in the upper right portion of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and is displayed during a time-reduced game state or a special game (the game state is It is a notification image that is always displayed during a specific game period such as a non-time reduction game state). In addition, when the game state is to execute left-handed hitting in a non-time-reduced gaming state in which a special game is not executed, a second right-handed hitting notification image (left-handed hitting) may be displayed (for example, in the right channel When the placed second main game starter electric accessory B11d is activated).
(3) Of the notification images, the third notification image is an image that is displayed in a strip shape at the upper end and the lower end of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and is a notification that is always displayed mainly during execution of the special game. It is an image. In this embodiment, the third notification image is displayed during the special game, but in other embodiments, the second notification image is displayed instead of the third notification image during the special game. (For example, the third notification image is displayed when the big prize opening is open, and the second notification image is displayed when it is closed).
(4) Among the notification images, the "fourth notification image" is displayed in a relatively smaller range than the first notification image and the second notification image in the lower left of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. It is an image in which a right-pointing arrow and a left-pointing arrow are arranged vertically. Further, the fourth notification image is an image that is basically always displayed, not only immediately after a change in the game state or during a specific game period, and is not limited to the effect display device SG, and may be displayed on other effect displays. For example, it may be provided in the center decoration D38 as the above-mentioned launch instruction display section HS, or it may be arranged side by side with the first main game symbol display device A20. In addition, the fourth notification image is a game situation in which a right-handed shot should be fired, but there is a period in which even if the right-handed shot is actually executed, it is not profitable for the player (for example, a big win during the execution of a special game). mouth closing period), the fourth notification image is configured to be "non-display", "blinking display", or "display with changed emission color, brightness, or transmittance", and the "non-display" In other words, when it is not "blinking display" or the like, it is always displayed as "right lighting" or "left lighting".
(5) Of the notification images, the fifth notification image is an image displayed in the entire vicinity of the center of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. In the fifth notification image (left-handed), a left-pointing arrow (to which a diagonal striped texture is pasted) with the characters "left-handed" is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is a mode, and in a situation where the game should be played with a left hand, a ball entrance that is easy to enter by right hitting and difficult to enter by left hitting (for example, right side general winning opening, right side auxiliary game start opening, third 2) is displayed by detecting a predetermined number A of balls entering the main game starting port) within a predetermined period A. In addition, in the fifth notification image (right shot), a right-pointing arrow (to which a diagonal striped texture is pasted) with the characters "Right shot" is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. In a situation where the game should be played with the right hand, it is easy to enter the ball with the left hand, but it is difficult to enter the ball with the right hand (for example, the first main game start opening, the left side general winning) It is displayed by detecting a predetermined number B of balls entering the mouth) within a predetermined period B, or the like. Note that the fifth notification image plays a role of warning or calling attention, and the display is erased when the cause of the warning is eliminated (the fifth notification image is a notification image that is not always displayed).

Returning to the explanation of the flow chart, next, at step 2747-4, the CPUSC of the sub control board S issues a new first main game start opening detection command (to indicate that a ball has entered the first main game start opening A10 It is a command, and it is easier to enter when hitting left than when hitting right) is received at the first main game start port A10. judge. If Yes at step 2747-4, at step 2747-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG. In addition, the fifth notification image is erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 to 10 seconds) has elapsed since the display of the fifth notification image. The displayed first notification image is erased). In addition, it is not limited to this, and when it is determined, for example, on the sub-control board S side that the player is shooting the game ball to the normal shooting position, or when the game state or the like shifts, the player When the firing position becomes the normal firing position, it may be deleted, or a message such as "OK" may be displayed in response to firing to the normal firing position. In other words, the conditions for ending the display of the fifth notification image may be appropriately changed in accordance with the playability. Next, in step 2747-6, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sounds, and outputs the sound "Right-handed!" from the right speaker D24R. Go to 7. On the other hand, if step 2747-4 is No, the process also proceeds to step 2747-7. Next, at step 2747-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the waste hitting condition is satisfied. Here, the waste hitting conditions are, for example, the time between rounds during the jackpot, the jackpot start demonstration time, the jackpot end demonstration time, the opening pattern of the jackpot is a short opening pattern, and the counter of the time reduction counter MP52c during round execution. During the variable fixed time after the final variation of the time-reduced game state when the value becomes 0, even if the game ball is shot with the right hand, it does not enter the big winning opening, and the second main game start opening It is configured to be satisfied when it is not advantageous for the player, such as when the player does not enter the ball. The status judgment regarding these wasteful hits is made by the main control board M to the sub control board S at the start and end of a big win, at the start and end of each round, and at the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. Judgment is made by appropriately receiving information such as the start of operation, the end of operation, and the end of pattern variation.

Next, in the case of Yes in step 2747-7, in step 2747-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fourth notification image with "non-lighting", and the next processing {step 2750 (second) processing}. In the second embodiment, the situation is that the game should be shot to the right. In the closed period), the fourth notification image is configured to be "non-display", but the display mode of the fourth display image is not limited to this, it can be distinguished from "right lighting", and further, " Any display mode may be used as long as it makes it possible to recognize that a higher profit is not obtained when a game ball is shot with a right-hand hit than in the case of "right lighting". It may be configured to be displayed by "blinking" or the like. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2747-7, in step 2747-9, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fourth notification image with "right lighting", and the next processing {step 2750 (second) processing}. Further, if No in step 2747-2, that is, if the content of the firing instruction command is related to left-handed hitting, in step 2748-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the first notification image ( Set the command to display left-handed. Next, in step 2747-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S issues a new general prize winning hole detection command (a command indicating that a ball has entered the general winning hole P10 provided on the right side of the board). At the port P10, it is determined whether or not a message "It is easier to enter the ball when hitting to the right than when hitting to the left" has been received. In the case of Yes at step 2747-10, at step 2747-11, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (left shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2747-12, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sounds, and outputs the sound "Left strike!" from the left speaker D24L. Go to 13. Thus, in the second embodiment, when the fifth notification image suggests that the game ball should be shot left-handed, a sound is output from the left speaker D24L, and the second notification image suggests that the game ball should be shot right-handed. It is configured to output a sound from the right speaker D24R when suggesting that a game ball should be shot by hitting with the left hand. It is configured to be able to recognize the effect. On the other hand, if No in step 2747-10, the process also proceeds to step 2747-13. Next, at step 2747-13, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fourth notification image with "left shot", and shifts to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}. do. As described above, in the second embodiment, as the display modes of the first notification image, the second notification image, and the fourth example image, an image instructing a right shot and an image instructing a left shot can be displayed. It is In this example, it is determined that the player is playing a right-handed game by entering the ball into the general winning opening P10, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined by entering the ball into the second main game start gate B10.

Next, on the right side of the figure are notification images (first notification image, second notification image, fourth notification image (right lighting), fourth notification image (left lighting), fourth notification image) according to the second embodiment. (non-lighting), fifth notification image (left-handed), and fifth notification image (right-handed) Note that the images for instructing left-handed hitting related to the first and second notification images are omitted. First, the first notification image should be placed in the center of the effect display device SG, and the game ball should be shot to the player in a range (region) relatively larger than that of the second notification image. On the other hand, the second notification image is an image that notifies the player to hit to the right in a relatively smaller range on the upper right side of the effect display device SG than the first notification image. There is, even if other effects (variation of decorative patterns and battle effects) are executed in the center, it is difficult to overlap (a mode that does not interfere with the visibility of other effects), and the recommended firing position It is possible to prevent a situation in which the notification becomes completely invisible (or to shorten the period during which the notification becomes invisible as much as possible). This image is displayed in a relatively smaller area than the notification image and the second notification image, and has a form in which a right-pointing arrow and a left-pointing arrow are vertically aligned. The right-side arrow lights up in the image that displays the normal right-handed instruction in the 4 notification image. (3) In addition, when the waste hitting condition is satisfied (for example, when the above-mentioned condition is satisfied, and the player enters the game When the ball is shot, there is almost no possibility that the player will get a profit), the mode displayed is a mode in which none of the arrows are illuminated, and the fourth notification image (right illumination) , and the fourth notification image (lighted on the left) clearly indicate to the player the position at which the game ball should be shot, but in a passive manner, the position at which the game ball should be shot is not notified. , The fourth notification image also has a mode that is unlikely to overlap with other effects that can be displayed in the center, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the notification of the recommended firing position is completely invisible (or invisible). (It is possible to shorten the period during which it is possible.) Incidentally, the mode of the fourth notification image is not limited to this example, and for example, in one place, an arrow on the right (a arrow (left ) may be alternately displayed, and when the waste beating condition is satisfied, the display may disappear, or may be displayed in a gray scale or blinking so that the player can see that the waste beating condition is satisfied. It may be configured to notify that the user is present. Also, even if the image is intended to be displayed at all times, in the case of Super Reach or the like, the image may not be displayed, thereby providing a more uplifting feeling to the player. On the other hand, it is also possible to configure so that right-handed shots and left-handed shots are always notified without providing such a display for preventing wasteful hitting. In addition, in the fifth notification image (right shot), a right-pointing arrow (to which a diagonal striped texture is pasted) with the characters “right shot” is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It is a mode to be done. In addition, the fifth notification image (left shot) is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG with a left-pointing arrow (to which a diagonal striped texture is pasted) to which the characters “left shot” are added. It is a mode to be done. The fifth notification image plays a role of warning and calling attention.

With the configuration as described above, when the player executes a game by hitting to the left in a situation where the player should hit to the right in the course of the game, the notification image is displayed in a more positive manner in the processing on the side of the sub-control board S. When instructing to hit to the right, a sound instructing to hit to the right is output from the right speaker D24R provided on the right side, while when instructing to hit to the left , and a speaker left D24L provided on the left side outputs a sound instructing the player to hit to the left. can be recognized visually and intuitively by hearing. In addition, these sounds are output on the same CH by configuring them to be output on a different CH than the normal BGM and production sound (output by a speaker different from the speaker that outputs the BGM). In such a case, by synthesizing it with the effect sound, it is possible to prevent the problem that the sound volume momentarily becomes too loud and the speaker becomes abnormal and the player cannot be notified. In addition, only one of the left and right speakers is switched to a dedicated CH, so that the other can output the performance sound, and the sound related to the performance is not interrupted, thereby preventing the decrease in the interest of the game. be able to. It should be noted that when the player shoots the game ball to an inappropriate (wrong) shooting position, the voice may be output from both speakers D24. As an example, the fifth notification image, which is a notification image to be emphasized when warning the player or the like, outputs sound from both the right speaker D 24R and the left speaker D 24L to the player. On the other hand, the second notification image, which is a notification image when it is desired to notify without emphasizing (only for the purpose of instructing), the second notification image (right shot) is output only from the right speaker D24R, and the second notification image ( Left-handed) may be configured to be output only from the left speaker D24L. With such a configuration, when displaying the second notification image for which the purpose is not to warn, by matching the firing direction with the direction of the sound output, the understanding of the progress of the game is facilitated. The purpose of the fifth notification image is to reliably notify (warn) the player even if there is a problem with either the right speaker D24R or the left speaker D24L (for example, a left-handed shot). When a sound is output only from the left speaker D24L when a warning is issued, if the right player hits the left speaker D24L while cheating, an effect sound is output from the right speaker D24R and the game is played normally. to prevent the situation from appearing to be progressing). In addition, in a situation where the player should hit left, the second notification image is not displayed when the player's inappropriate shooting of the game ball is not detected. The fourth display image, which is less conspicuous than the second notification image and the fifth notification image, can notify that the player should continuously hit to the right.

Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) in FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines the switching timing of the stay stage {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing when the special game ends (won), the timing when the game state shifts, It is determined whether it is the timing when the variation mode determination table is switched (even in the game state of ) or the timing when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number (even in the same game state). In the case of Yes in step 2752, in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the command for executing the battle defeat effect from the main control board M side has been received and the special game has ended. If Yes at step 2754 , at step 2756 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “evening stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767 . If No at step 2754, at step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the limited frequency B command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes at step 2758 , at step 2760 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “empty stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767 . In addition, in the case of No in step 2758, in step 2762, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is in the time reduction game state. If Yes at step 2762 , at step 2764 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “space stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767 . If No at step 2762 , in other words, if the game is in the non-time-reduction game state, at step 2766 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “ground stage” as the stay stage, and proceeds to step 2767 . Next, at step 2767, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S issues a separate display designation command (a command to the sub-sub-control board side for designating whether or not to display a notification image, the type of notification image to be displayed, and the display position of the notification image). Yes, and when the sub-sub control board receives the command, the notification image is displayed on the effect display device SG) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). Note that even if No in step 2752, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). In this way, after the end of the big win in which the battle defeat effect is executed during the big win (there are cases of the non-probability variable game state and the time shortened game state, and cases of the probability variable game state and the time shortened game state). "Evening stage" is set, and after the jackpot is over, the state changes to the probability variable game state and the time reduction game state, and the battle defeat effect is not executed during the jackpot (during the jackpot, the battle victory effect and blessing When the production is executed), the ``space stage'' is set after the big win is completed, and the ``empty stage'' is set after the small winning is completed (after receiving the command to execute the small winning medium production). In the case of a non-time-reduction game state (including after the completion of a jackpot involving no time-saving jackpot pattern), the "ground stage" is set, that is, the stop pattern of the main game pattern and the special game state. The stay stage to be set is different depending on the game state after the end of .

By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot, the number of time reductions given, and the number of rounds executed during the jackpot are changed by the stop symbols related to the jackpot. Also, based on the information from the main control board M side, the processing on the sub control board S side provides a display (especially, right hand hitting) that guides the player to the correct progress of the game at an appropriate timing. and an instruction display to encourage left-handed hitting), making it a user-friendly model for players.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Based on the information from the main control board M side, the processing on the sub control board S side provides a display (especially, an instruction display prompting right-handed and left-handed players) to guide the player to proceed with the correct game at an appropriate timing. The aspect to be performed is not limited to this, and another aspect of the processing on the sub-control board S side will be described as modification 1 from the second embodiment, and only the points of modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) in FIG. 46 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2150 (second modification 1) and step 2250 (second modification 1). After setting the command to display the second notification image in the SG, in step 2150 (second variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes right-handed image display control processing described later, and proceeds to step 2747-7. Transition. Further, in the case of No in step 2747-2, in other words, when the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the firing instruction command is related to left-handed hitting, in step 2250 (second transformation 1), the sub-control board The CPUSC of S executes left-handed image display control processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2747-13.

Next, FIG. 52 is a flow chart of right-handed image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second modification 1) of FIG. 51 in modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, at step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the first starting hole confirmation flag (flag for monitoring the ball-in rate of the first main game starting hole A10) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new first main game start entrance ball detection command has been received. If Yes at step 2154, at step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the first start port confirmation flag. Next, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the first starting port confirmation timer MP21t (decrement timer, which is a timer for managing the period for monitoring the rate of entering the first main game starting port A10). A predetermined value (30 seconds in this example) is set and started, and the process proceeds to step 2164 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S issues a new first main game start opening detection command (under the condition that the first start opening confirmation flag is ON). Determine whether or not it has been received. If Yes at step 2160, at step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the first starting entrance ball entry rate counter MP61c, and proceeds to step 2164.

Next, at step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the first starting entrance ball entry rate counter MP61c is smaller than the notification value (two in this example). If Yes at step 2164, at step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the first starting port confirmation timer MP21t is zero. If Yes in step 2166 , the process proceeds to step 2171 . On the other hand, if No at step 2164, at step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from BGM and other effect sounds, outputs the voice "Right shot!" do. Next, at step 2171, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S clears the counter value of the first starting entrance ball entry rate counter MP61c to zero. Next, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the first start port confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7). Incidentally, even if No in step 2154 or step 2166, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7).

With the configuration as described above, in a situation in which the player should hit the right in the course of the game, a predetermined number (three in this example) of inputs to the first main game start port during a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example). When there is a ball (that is, when the game is played left-handed), the effect display device SG displays the first notification image in addition to the second notification image, and the right speaker D24R displays the first notification image. A hitting instruction can be output. In this way, when the player erroneously shoots the game ball to the left side and immediately returns to the right side although he/she recognizes that he/she should play the game with the right side, the above notification is executed. On the other hand, the above notification (notification by the first notification image) as a warning can be executed only when the player continues the left-handed game with the intention of continuing the left-handed game. there is Note that the predetermined value set in the first start port confirmation timer MP21t and the value of the notification value (two in this example) are not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed depending on the configuration of the game machine. Moreover, the requirements for executing the above warning (notification) are not limited to this example. For example, as a method for the sub-control board S side to recognize that the player is playing left-handed, (1) as a configuration in which a general winning opening P10 is provided on the left side of the game area D30, the general winning opening P10 Left-handed hitting may be detected by the provided general winning hole entrance ball detection device P11s. may be configured to detect In addition, as a game ball counting method, (A) a timer process for measuring a predetermined period is repeatedly executed, and a plurality of inappropriate game balls enter (or pass) within any period. (B) It may be configured to require that there are a predetermined number of inappropriate ball entries (or passes) without executing timer processing. In the case of (B) above, the counter may be configured to be cleared when the power is turned off, when the standby demonstration is shifted, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Moreover, although the determination of these requirements is processed on the sub control board S side, it is not limited to this, and may be performed on the main control board M side. It should be noted that, when the requirements for executing the notification described above are met, the configuration is such that the notification is performed immediately, but the invention is not limited to this. If this is not appropriate, the notification image may be displayed after the situation is resolved. For example, when it is considered that the display of the notification image is not good, such as during the reach, the notification may be performed after the end of the reach. In addition, during reach, it may be configured not to count the above-mentioned inappropriate game ball entry itself, and during a specific judgment period (for example, during symbol temporary stop, immediately before symbol fluctuation start, during fluctuation fixed time, etc.) ) may be configured to count the entry of inappropriate game balls (for example, 1 ball). Immediate notification is preferable from the point of view of player's disadvantage. On the other hand, the mode of turning on the flag and notifying later concentrates on the ready-to-win effect, etc., and reduces the effect on the interest of the effect. It is preferable from the point of view. It should be noted that, during the ready-to-win effect, the notification may be made immediately in a small and inconspicuous manner, and after the end of the ready-to-win effect, the notification may be switched to a noticeable condition.

Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of left-handed image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second modification 1) of FIG. 51 in Modification 1 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the general winning hole confirmation flag (flag for monitoring the ball entry rate of the general winning hole P10 arranged on the right side of the game board) is off. judge. In the case of Yes at step 2252, at step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new general winning hole entrance ball detection command has been received. In the case of Yes at step 2254, at step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the general winning hole confirmation flag. Next, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets a predetermined value (this In the example, 10 seconds) is set to start, and the process proceeds to step 2264 . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new general winning opening detection command has been received (with the general winning opening confirmation flag turned on). determine whether If Yes at step 2260, at step 2262, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the general winning hole entry ball rate counter MP62c, and proceeds to step 2264.

Next, at step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the general winning hole entry ball rate counter MP62c is smaller than the notification value (two in this example). In the case of Yes at step 2264, at step 2266, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t is zero. If Yes at step 2266 , the process proceeds to step 2271 . On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2264, at step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (left shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from BGM and other effect sounds, outputs the voice "Left strike!" do. Next, at step 2271, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the counter value of the general winning hole entry ball rate counter MP62c to zero. Next, at step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the general winning hole confirmation flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-13 process). Incidentally, even if No in step 2254 or step 2266, the next process (process of step 2747-13) is performed. In FIGS. 52 and 53, the first notification image is displayed when a predetermined number of balls enter the first main game start opening or the general winning opening for a predetermined period of time. The fifth notification image may be displayed for the purpose of

With the configuration as described above, in a situation in which the player should hit left in the course of the game, the player can enter the general winning hole P10 provided on the right side of the game area D30 for a predetermined period (two seconds in this example). Then, when there is a predetermined number (three in this example) of ball entry, the effect display device SG displays the first notification image in addition to the second notification image, and the player hits left with the left speaker D24L. An instruction voice can be output. In this way, when the player erroneously shoots the game ball to the right side while recognizing that the game should be played left-handed, and immediately returns to left-handed, the above-mentioned notification is difficult to execute, and the player cannot Only when the player continues the right-handed game with the intention of continuing the right-handed game, the above notification as a warning can be executed. It should be noted that the predetermined value set in the general winning hole confirmation timer MP22t and the value of the notification value are not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed depending on the configuration of the gaming machine. Moreover, the requirements for executing the warning (notification) are not limited to this example. For example, as a method for the sub-control board S side to recognize that the player is hitting to the right, (1) a sensor may be provided at any position where the game ball on the right side of the game area D30 flows down. Alternatively, (2) it may be that a ball has entered (or passed through) the auxiliary game starting port H10 or the second main game starting port B10. In addition, as a requirement for notification, (A) timer processing for a predetermined period is repeatedly executed, and a plurality of inappropriate game balls entering (or passing) within each period may be a requirement. However, (B) it may be configured to require that a predetermined number of inappropriate ball entries (or passes) have occurred without executing timer processing. In addition, (C) when information to the effect that the number of reserves on the auxiliary game side has reached a predetermined value or more (for example, two or more) is received as a command from the main control board M (only on the right side of the game board Limited to the configuration where the game start port is arranged). In the case of the above (B), the counter can be configured to be cleared when the power is turned off, when the standby demo shifts, or when a predetermined time has elapsed. Even if one ball or two balls pass through the starting hole H10 by chance, the pattern variation of the auxiliary game pattern automatically subtracts the information serving as the notification condition, so there is no need to provide a separate counter. . Moreover, although the determination of these requirements is processed on the sub control board S side, it is not limited to this, and may be performed on the main control board M side. It should be noted that, when the requirements for executing the notification described above are met, the configuration is such that the notification is performed immediately, but the invention is not limited to this. If this is not appropriate, the notification image may be displayed after the situation is resolved. For example, when it is considered that the display of the notification image does not look good, such as during the ready-to-win effect, the notification may be performed after the end of the ready-to-win effect. Also, during reach, it may be configured not to count the above-mentioned inappropriate game ball entry itself, or during a specific judgment period (for example, during symbol temporary stop, immediately before symbol fluctuation start, during fluctuation fixed time) A configuration in which the number of incoming balls is counted only in (eg, one ball) may be adopted. Immediate notification is preferable from the point of view of player's disadvantage. On the other hand, the mode of turning on the flag and notifying later concentrates on the ready-to-win effect, etc., and reduces the effect on the interest of the effect. It is preferable from the point of view. It should be noted that, during the ready-to-win effect, the notification may be made immediately in a small and inconspicuous manner, and after the end of the ready-to-win effect, the notification may be switched to a noticeable condition.

As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the player accidentally shoots the game ball with an inappropriate shooting intensity, the game ball will not be shot normally unless the shooting of the inappropriate game ball is continued. A user-friendly model can be provided by configuring so as not to execute the notification for prompting the game by the shooting intensity of the game ball, and by preventing the notification from becoming excessive notification for the player.

In the modification 1 from the second embodiment, the first notification image is displayed when a predetermined number of inappropriate game ball entries are detected during a predetermined period of time. The mode of monitoring the entry of a game ball is not limited to this. It may be configured such that an error is notified when a predetermined number of incoming balls are detected. In addition, although the configuration is such that the inappropriate ball entry is monitored on the sub control board S side, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to determine whether or not, and transmit the determination information to the sub control board S side.

(Third embodiment)
In the second embodiment, when the player shoots an inappropriate game ball during the course of the game, the information (command) from the main control board M side is used to notify the player through the process of the sub control board S side. In addition to the configuration, the configuration for informing the player to stop the shooting of the game balls, which is disadvantageous to the player, has been described in detail, but such a configuration is not limited to this. As for another aspect of preventing game balls from being shot in vain for the player, only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 54 is a flow chart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 1110 (third), that is, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds one auxiliary game reserved ball, and then in step 1110 (third) , The CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the auxiliary game reservation number command (information related to the number of reservations on the auxiliary game side in which the number of reserved balls has increased, and is a command sent to the sub control board S side), and the next process (Processing of step 1200).

Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the electric accessary product drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are step 1223 (third), step 1231-1 (third) to step 1231-3 (third), and step 1245 (third). At 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the auxiliary game reserved ball, and after starting the variation of the auxiliary game symbols according to the determination, at step 1223 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M Auxiliary game reservation number command (information related to the number of reservations on the side of the auxiliary game in which the reservation ball has been digested, and a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1224 . Also, in step 1230, when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the auxiliary game stop symbol is a winning symbol ("D1" or "D2"), in step 1231-1 (third), the main control board CPUMC of M determines whether or not the auxiliary game time saving flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1231-1 (third), in step 1231-2 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the auxiliary game stop symbol is a long open winning symbol {the first winning symbol on the auxiliary game side. 2 The opening period of the main game starter electric accessory B11d (if it is opened multiple times, it may be the longest single opening period or the total opening period) is relatively long (especially, the auxiliary When the game time reduction flag is off)) it is a winning design, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is "D2"}. In the case of Yes in step 1231-2 (third), in step 1231-3 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an electric accessory release command (the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d opens (a command to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1232 . It should be noted that the process proceeds to step 1232 even if No in step 1231-1 (third) or step 1231-2 (third). In addition, the timing to set the electric accessary product release command is not limited to this, and may be configured to be set at the timing before the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side is stopped and displayed. As an example, it may be configured to be set at a timing a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) before the timing of stop display during symbol variation related to winning symbols on the auxiliary game side. By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to shoot a game ball toward the second main game starter electric accessory B11d before the opening timing of the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, The game machine can be made user-friendly considering the time from when the game ball is shot until it reaches the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. Also, in step 1244, after the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, in step 1245 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues an electric accessory closing command. (The second main game starter electric accessory B11d is a command related to information indicating that it has closed, and is a command to the sub-control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1246. Only when the second main game starter electric accessory B11d is opened for a long period of time (for example, 5 seconds and the game ball is easy to enter), the electric accessory open command is set. may be configured to Also, considering the period of flowing down on the game board D35, the timing of transmission of the electric role product open command and the electric role product close command (that is, the first notification image is displayed as described later, or the first notification The second main game starter electric accessory B11d may be opened and closed with a delay of a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) from the timing at which the image is erased. With such a configuration, after the game ball is shot toward the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, the shot game ball reaches the second main game starter electric accessory B11d. The first notification image can be displayed in consideration of the period, and when the player visually recognizes the first notification image, the game ball is shot toward the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d. By the time the fired game ball reaches the second main game starter electric accessory B11d, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a predetermined period has passed since the second main game starter electric accessory B11d started to open. can do.

Next, FIG. 56 is a flow chart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1314 (third) and step 1334 (third). After setting the hold generation command of the 1 main game content determination random number, in step 1314 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues the 1st main game hold number command (the hold number on the 1st main game side is added). It is the information of the number of reservations on the first main game side that is set again, and the command to be sent to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1322 . At step 1332, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the second main game content determination random number pending generation command to the side of the sub control board S, at step 1334 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M , 2nd main game hold number command (information on the hold number on the 2nd main game side that is set when the hold number on the 2nd main game side is added, and a command sent to the sub control board S side) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1400).

Next, FIG. 57 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutines of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 8 in the third embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are step 1407 (third) and step 1408 (third). is deleted from the hold information and the remaining hold information is shifted (hold digestion), in step 1408 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a hold number command (sub control board It is a command to the S side, and if the hold on the first main game side is canceled, it is the first main game hold number command, and if the hold on the second main game side is canceled, it is the second main game. pending number command) and go to step 1410-1. On the other hand, if No in step 1407 (third), in other words, if the canceled hold was the hold on the first main game side, step 1410 is performed without step 1408 (third) processing. -1.

Next, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) according to the third embodiment. is. The difference from the second embodiment is that, especially when the lottery result on the main game side is a loss, the allocation of the variable time is different according to the number of reservations that exist. That is, when the number of holdings on the main game side is small, a relatively long variation time is selected.

Next, FIG. 59 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the third embodiment. First, the differences from the second embodiment are steps 1627-1 (third) and 1627-2 (third). That is, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the game state information command (command to the sub-control board S side) relating to the special game, and then in step 1627-1 (third), the main control The CPUMC of the board M determines whether or not the first (second) prize winning opening C10 (C20) has received the reported number of prizes (9 in this example). That is, when the next one wins, the first (second) big win C10 (C20) closes (in this example, it closes when the number of wins reaches 10). In the example, it is determined whether or not the notified number has been reached, with 9) as the notified number. If Yes in step 1627-1 (third), in step 1627-2 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M issues a command immediately before closing {a command to the sub-control board S side, 2) Set a command to the effect that the big winning opening C10 (C20) is about to close, and proceed to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1627-1 (third), the process proceeds to step 1628 (second) without setting the immediately before closing command.

With the configuration as described above, on the main control board M side, the timing immediately before the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20) closes based on the determination whether the number of winning awards has reached a predetermined number. , a command to that effect can be transmitted to the sub control board side. Incidentally, the reported number is not limited to this example, and may be a value smaller by 2 or a value smaller by 3 than the predetermined number, which is the condition for closing the big winning opening. In addition, as a configuration that can determine the number of game balls flowing down on the game board D35, "the number of game balls on the board surface + the number of game balls that have already entered the large winning opening ≧ the predetermined condition that the large winning opening closes" number (for example, 10)”, the third notification image regarding the firing position is deleted from the effect display device SG, or the mode is switched (to the second notification image). good too. The opening pattern of the big winning hole is not limited to this example (for example, if the condition for ending the opening of the big winning hole is that one ball is entered, the condition is to send a command just before closing at the same time as the opening. , When designing the performance for the purpose of ensuring that the ball is released (entering the ball), design not to send the command immediately before closing, and if it is difficult to expect an increase in the number of balls to be released, close the performance with emphasis on performance. It is possible to appropriately design such as transmitting the previous command and deleting/switching the third notification image.). In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the immediately before closing command is transmitted in accordance with the opening pattern (the value of the timer for measuring the opening time). Specifically, the immediately before closing command may be transmitted immediately before (for example, two seconds before) the large winning opening is closed based on the opening pattern, or immediately before closing due to the winning of the large winning opening as described above. It may be configured to be used together with a command. In addition, in a situation where it is confirmed that 9 balls will enter the big winning hole (for example, game balls on the board + game balls that have already entered the big winning hole = 9 balls), "Aim for over winning! (a notification image suggesting that the player should aim for a ball that exceeds a predetermined number of balls, which is the condition for closing the big winning opening). In this case, if an over-winning occurs, an effect may be executed to congratulate the player. In the third embodiment, a command such as a command immediately before closing is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, and when the sub control board S receives the command, the notification image is displayed based on the command. Although it is configured to perform display control, information for judging the type of jackpot received from the main control board M (jackpot start demo command, etc.) Based on the command sent when a ball is detected, and the command sent when a valid ball is detected in the right general winning hole, the sub-control board S controls the status of the ball entering the big winning hole, etc. It may be configured such that a command to be output to the sub-sub control board is determined by making a determination in line with the processing of the third embodiment.

Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) in FIG. 46 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 2650 (third), that is, step 2747-6 when a new ball enters the first main game start opening A10 or general winning opening P10. Or, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses a CH different from BGM and other effect sounds and outputs the voice "Right shot!" from the right speaker D24R, or in step 2747-12 , BGM, and other sound effect sounds, and after outputting the voice "Hit left!" from the left speaker D24L, the CPUSC of the sub control board S A game assistance effect display control process is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}.

Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the game assistance effect display control process related to the subroutine of step 2650 (third) of FIG. 60 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2651, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the current game state is a non-time-reduced game state (or whether the game state on the auxiliary game side is a non-time-reduced game state ) is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2651, in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a command immediately before closing has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes at step 2652 , at step 2654 the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the second notification image, and proceeds to step 2656 . On the other hand, if step 2652 is No, the process proceeds to step 2656 as well. Next, at step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it has received an electric accessory release command from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 2656, at step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG (the second notification image is continuously displayed). ), the process proceeds to step 2660 . On the other hand, if the result of step 2656 is No, the process proceeds to step 2660 as well. Next, at step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the electric accessary product closing command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes at step 2660, at step 2662, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the first notification image (right shot) (only the second notification image is displayed), and then the next It shifts to processing {process of step 2750 (second)}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2660, the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}.

Further, in the case of No in step 2651, in other words, when the current game state is the time reduction game state, in step 2668, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the second main game pending number command, the current second Check the number of main games on hold. Next, at step 2672, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second main game pending number is equal to or less than a predetermined number (one in this example). In the case of Yes at step 2672, at step 2674, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG, and the next process {step 2750 (second) }. Further, if No in step 2672, in other words, if the second main game pending number is 2 or more, in step 2676, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the display of the first notification image (right shot). A command is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}. In this example, the first notification image (right shot) is displayed when the second main game hold is less than a predetermined number (one in this example) in the time shortening game state. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display the first notification image (right shot) when the number of auxiliary games on hold is equal to or less than a specific number (for example, one) in the time shortening game state. In the same figure, the first notification image is displayed when the second main game hold is equal to or less than a predetermined number in the time shortened game state. In the case where the game property is such that the game property is significantly impaired when the number of symbols becomes 0 (such as when it is disadvantageous for the player to hit a big hit with the first main game symbol in the time-reduced game state), the second It is preferable that the notification image displayed when the main game pending number is equal to or less than a predetermined number is the fifth notification image.

With the configuration as described above, (1) during the execution of the special game, the second notification image of right-handed or left-handed is erased immediately before the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20) closes. , (2) Display the first notification image (right shot) during the long opening of the second main game start electric accessory B11d in the non-time reduction game state (when the auxiliary game time reduction flag is off), ( 3) In the time shortening game state, the second main game holding number is configured to display the first notification image (right shot) when the predetermined number (one in this example) or less, so that the time shortening game In this state, it is possible to assist the execution of the variation of the second main game symbols without interruption, and it is possible to provide a user-friendly model. It should be noted that the second main game pending number, which is the condition for displaying or erasing the first notification image (right shot), is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, two, or the second main game pending number. can be changed depending on the upper limit number of Furthermore, when the second main game pending number exceeds a predetermined number, the first notification image (right shot) is configured to be erased, but it is not limited to this, and the first notification image (right shot) is displayed. A more passive display, for example, a black and white display, or a change in the position and size to make the display less conspicuous, etc., to remind the player of the timing at which the game ball would be wasted. It may be configured to display that (the number of pending auxiliary games may also be configured similarly).

Also, with the only requirement that the number of second main game reservations is a predetermined number (eg, 2) or less, or the requirement that the number of auxiliary game reservations is a predetermined number (eg, 1) or less, A fifth notification image may be displayed. As for the timing of notification, the notification may be made immediately when the requirement is met, or when the requirement is met, the flag may be turned on and the notification may be made from the start of the next fluctuation. Further, as a requirement for erasing, it is also possible to configure erasing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed or when the number of reservations reaches the upper limit. In addition, when the fifth notification image is configured to be erased after being displayed for a certain period of time, for example, when the number of reservations on the main game side is 0 and the change on the second main game side, or when the first main game side In the case of fluctuations with a relatively long fluctuation time, such as fluctuations on the game side, the period during which the fifth notification image is displayed is relatively long (for example, until the first stop timing of the decorative pattern). On the other hand, the fifth notification image may be erased in a relatively short period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds) during short-term fluctuations. In particular, when the second main game side is configured in an advantageous manner to the player, no effect is given in the loss variation of the first main game side, or the color of the fifth notification image relating to right-handed hitting is changed. Etc., it is also possible to provide a configuration in which a remarkable difference is provided between the aspect of the fifth notification image when the first main game side changes and the aspect of the fifth notification image when the second main game side changes, in order to make the fifth notification image stand out. In addition, in the case of super reach or the like, the fifth notification image may be deleted, or as a passive mode, it may be configured so as not to reduce the interest of the presentation. In addition to the display of the reach, etc., as a configuration for displaying the notification image, the degree of expectation of the special game (the magnitude of profit for the player, for example, the transition to the probability variable game state after the special game is completed) The degree of expectation) may be indicated by a difference in color displayed, or, on the other hand, when the degree of reliability is high, the degree of reliability may be suggested by not displaying it. When suggesting such reliability by changing the form, the second notification image and the fifth notification image are changed to a passive form (displayed in a small size, displayed in the corner of the effect display device SG, etc.). For example, it is preferable to adopt a mode that does not affect the interest of the presentation. In the second embodiment, the display mode of the notification image is determined on the sub control board S side based on the information from the main control board M side. A configuration may also be adopted in which the display and its mode are also determined, and the information is transmitted to the sub-control board S side.

Also, in the game auxiliary effect display control process shown in FIG. Since the game symbols and the game symbols can be changed at the same time, the variation effect display of the main game symbols and the first notification are displayed at the timing immediately after the notification condition of the first notification image related to the number of auxiliary game reservations is established. There are cases where it is not appropriate to display the image overlaid (for example, during the reach effect, when the main game pattern is stopped, etc.). Therefore, the display of the first notification image associated with the number of balls held in the auxiliary game only sets a flag when the notification start condition is established, and when the timing to notify appropriately comes (for example, when the next main game pattern starts to fluctuate etc.). In addition, when controlling in this way, after the flag is turned on, when a big hit is started by the main game pattern that is fluctuating at that time, or during the reach production period or the remaining fluctuation period, the number of auxiliary game holding balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the first notification image from being displayed at inappropriate timing.

(Fourth embodiment)
In the second embodiment, when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry opening such as the first main game start opening or a general winning opening, an appropriate game ball is not shot in accordance with the progress of the game. Although the notification image is displayed when it is determined, such a configuration is not limited to the second embodiment. As a configuration for displaying a notification image when it is determined that a game ball is not properly shot in accordance with the progress of the game, a configuration different from the second embodiment is provided as a fourth embodiment, which is different from the second embodiment. Only the differences are detailed.

First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the fourth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are step 1627-3 (fourth), step 1627-4 (fourth), step 1633-1 (fourth), and step 1633-2 (fourth), namely , in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the game state information command (command to the sub-control board S side) during the special game, and then in step 1627-3 (fourth), the main control board The CPUMC of M determines whether or not a ball has entered the first (second) big winning hole C10 (C20). If Yes in step 1627-3 (fourth), in step 1627-4 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the round entry number counter MP70c (the game ball that entered the big winning hole during the round 1 is added to the counter value of the number counter), and the process proceeds to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, even if No in step 1627-3 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1628 (second). Also, in step 1632 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first (second) big winning hole, and then in step 1633-1 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M A round entry ball count command (a command to the sub-control board S side, and a command relating to the number of game balls entered into the big winning hole by the end of each round in each round) is set. Next, in step 1633-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the round entering ball number counter MP70c to zero, and proceeds to step 1634.

Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (fourth) of FIG. 46 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2748-1, at step 2748-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the second notification image on the effect display device SG, and performs the following processing {step 2750 (second) processing}. Further, in the case of No in step 2748-1, in step 2748-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game is being executed. In the case of Yes at step 2748-3, at step 2550 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game in-game notification image display control process described later, and performs the next process {of step 2750 (second). processing}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2748-3, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of special game in-game notification image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) of FIG. 63 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the opening mode of the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20) in the special game based on the received launch instruction command. Next, at step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first round is being executed. If Yes at step 2554 , go to step 2564 . On the other hand, if No at step 2554, at step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the previous round was the long open round. In the case of Yes at step 2556, at step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current round is a long open round. In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the received round entry number command, enters the first (second) big winning hole C10 (C20) in the previous round. check the number. Next, at step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of balls entering the first (second) big winning hole C10 (C20) is equal to or less than a predetermined value (2 balls in this example). judge. If Yes at step 2562 , go to step 2566 . On the other hand, if No in step 2556 , step 2558 or step 2562 , go to step 2564 . Next, at step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the second notification image on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}. Next, at step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}. Transition.

With the configuration as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the large winning opening is opened by the long opening pattern in the round being executed (the game ball is moved to the large winning opening If a predetermined number of game balls (three balls in this example) or more do not enter at the end of the round, a command from the main control board M side is issued. Based on, a fifth notification image (for example, an image that gives a relatively positive notification to the player compared to the second notification image) is displayed, and the game ball is shot to the appropriate shooting position to the player. You will be notified that you can make a profit. In other words, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the player should hit to the right during the execution of the special game and that the number of balls obtained in the special game is significantly reduced, thereby providing a user-friendly machine. can do.

Incidentally, the aspect of the fifth notification image and the second notification image indicates that the player is using the fifth notification image (relatively active display) and the second notification image (relatively passive display). As long as it is a recognizable aspect, it is not limited to these. For example, the second notification image may be displayed in an area separately provided outside the effect display device SG. The fifth notification image may not be displayed, and may be configured to add only an effect using sound or light. Also, the number of hit balls, which is a condition for executing the notification (warning), is not limited, and the notification may be made only when no ball is hit. In this example, when the big winning hole is open for two consecutive rounds, it is determined that the ball entered the big winning hole in the previous round, and the fifth notification image can be executed. However, it is not limited to this, and if there is only a ball entry of a predetermined value or less in any of the long open rounds, then the fifth notification image (notification image in a relatively aggressive manner) may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured to be displayed at the start of the first long open round thereafter. In addition, as the timing of erasing the fifth notification image, the display during the long open round subject to the requirements may be continued. It may be configured to be erased when a ball is entered into the ball, or may be configured to be erased with the lapse of a predetermined period of time. In this example, based on information from the main control board M side (for example, the count number of the round entry ball count MP70c and the launch instruction command), the display is executed as a process on the sub control board S side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode, display timing, etc. may be determined by the processing on the main control board M side, and a command related to the indication display may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. . In the case where the display mode of the notification image in the next round is configured to be different depending on the number of game balls entering the big winning hole in the previous round during the execution of the big win, for example, If the configuration is such that the fifth notification image is displayed in the next round when the number of hit balls is 3 or less, the data related to the number of hit balls in the previous round ( For example, in the case of 3 balls, the logical product of "00000011") and the mask data (e.g., "11111100") is taken, and if the calculation result is 0, it is determined that there were 3 or less balls entered. In addition, on the sub control board S side, the counter value related to the number of balls entering the big winning hole related to the previous round is a predetermined value or less, and the counter value related to the start of the next round The fifth notification image may be displayed when the firing instruction command is received from the main control board M side.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the configuration for warning (reporting) that the player should play right-handed in order to prevent the player from being able to obtain a legitimate ball during execution of the special game was described in detail. In the special game being executed, the mode of informing the player of the launch of the game ball is not limited to this. As another example of such a notification mode, only changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail as Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment.

First, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step (fourth) of FIG. 46 in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 2784-4 (fourth modification 1), that is, in steps 2748-1 and 2748-3, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S is in the non-time reduction game state. Yes, and after determining that the special game is not being executed, in step 2748-4 (fourth variation 1), the notification image changing flag (if it is on, the display mode of the second notification image can change flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of special game in-game notification image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) of FIG. 65 in Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment. First, the changes from the fourth embodiment are steps 2568 (fourth modification 1), steps 2570 (fourth modification 1) to 2574 (fourth modification 1), and steps 2578 (fourth modification 1) to 2584 (Fourth Variation 1) That is, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S opens the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20) of the special game based on the received launch instruction command. After confirming the mode, in step 2568 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the notification image changing flag is turned off. If Yes in step 2568 (fourth variant 1), the process proceeds to step 2554 . On the other hand, if No in step 2568 (fourth variation 1), the process proceeds to step 2578 (fourth variation 1). Further, in step 2560, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the number of balls entered into the first (second) big winning hole C10 (C20) in the previous round based on the received round entry number command, In step 2570 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the number of balls entering the first (second) big winning hole C10 (C20) is a predetermined value (11 balls in this example) or more. Determine whether or not If Yes in step 2570 (fourth variation 1), in step 2572 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the display mode of the second notification image being displayed by one step (details are Set the command to display (described later). Next, at step 2574 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the notification image changing flag, and proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}.

Next, at step 2578 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current round is a long open round. If Yes in step 2578 (fourth variation 1), in step 2580 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the received round entry number command, the first (second ) Check the number of balls entering the big winning slot. Next, in step 2582 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the number of balls entering the first (second) big winning hole is a predetermined value (the number of balls entering the big winning hole is It is determined whether or not the number of balls that exceeds the number, in other words, the number of balls that cause an over-winning, is 11 balls or more in this example. If Yes in step 2582 (fourth variation 1), in step 2584 (fourth variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S issues a command to change the display mode of the second notification image being displayed by one step. is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}. If No in step 2578 (fourth variation 1) or step 2582 (fourth variation 1), the next process {step 2750 (second)} is performed.

Next, the table in the upper part of the figure is a table showing an example of the transition of the display mode of the second notification image. As shown in the figure, during execution of the special game, the second notification image is displayed as stage 1 in a display mode without characters, as shown in the upper right part of the display image of the notification image shown in the upper right of the same figure. . In addition, as stage 2 of the above-mentioned "single-step change" mode, one character (in this example, one character) is configured to be displayed together with the second notification image, as shown in the lower part of the display image diagram of the notification image. ing. Furthermore, from stage 3 to stage 5, the number of characters displayed together with the second notification image increases one by one. In step 2584 (fourth variation 1), if the display mode of the second notification image is four characters (that is, stage 5), the mode of the second notification image is configured so as not to change any more. ing. With the configuration as described above, in the modification 1 from the fourth embodiment, the notification image in this example is limited to a mode of notifying (warning) the player when a proper game is not executed. First, the player is a method of technical intervention (for example, it is a method of technical intervention also called "over winning", and the large winning opening is closed by adjusting the shooting intensity of the game ball during the execution of the special game. If a relatively large number of balls are successfully obtained during the execution of a special game, a performance to congratulate the player can be executed. It can be configured to create a configuration that arouses the player's satisfaction.

The mode of the second notification image is not limited to this example, and the color and gradation of the second notification image can be changed, the character can be changed as the stage goes up, and a stepwise effect production (for example, , the color can be changed, or the surroundings of the second notification image can be glittered). In addition, if the notification image is a long open round next time on the condition that there was a predetermined value or more of balls (in this example, 11 or more balls) in the previous round, and that this time is a long open round In addition, the second notification image is configured to change step by step, but this is not a limitation, and when there is a ball hit of a predetermined value or more, that is, when there is an "over winning", the display mode of the second notification image is changed. As a gradual change, the number of successful "over winnings" up to the final round may be continuously displayed. Also, the timing of changing the display may be the time when "over winning" is detected. It should be noted that, in the long opening round, when all the players have succeeded in "over winning", a separate effect ("Congratulations!" or blessing by voice) may be provided. It should be noted that the second notification image may be changed stepwise when the round ends with a specific number or less of balls entering the game, without being limited to the case of a successful "over winning". In addition, when "over winning" occurs, it can also be applied as a performance of suggesting and notifying in advance whether or not there is a big hit pending in the second main game pending after the special game ends. For example, each time an "over winning" occurs in each long open round, whether or not there is a hold for a big hit in the hold related to the second main game, the big win pattern when the big win is made, the big win performance being executed, etc. Using a different lottery table according to the information, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to increase the number of characters (increase by one or a plurality of characters), so that the hold for the second main game can be a big hit. It is also possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for something (it is determined that there is a big win in the reserve by reaching the final stage).

(Fifth embodiment)
In the second to fourth embodiments, based on the command (information) from the main control board M side, images for notifying, warning, and congratulating the progress of the game are displayed. The mode of notifying about is not limited to this. Furthermore, in addition to the information from the main control board M side, an example of a mode of notifying the player of the progress of the game as a process of the sub control board S side especially in the standby state will be described below as a fifth embodiment. Only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control section SM side) in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2450 (fifth), that is, in step 2450 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes standby demonstration display control processing, which will be described later, Go to step 2100 .

Next, FIG. 68 is a flow chart of standby demonstration display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fifth) in FIG. 67 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game has been executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 180 seconds) or longer. Here, whether the game is not executed or not is determined by various ball detection commands from the main control board M side {auxiliary game start ball ball detection command, first (second) main game start ball entry detection of a ball detection command, a general winning hole entry ball detection command, etc.}, or detection of the operation of the firing handle D44 (level data transmitted from the main control board M side regarding the handle touch situation is continuously detected during the detection period of a predetermined period. ON information) determines whether or not a game is to be executed. In the case of Yes at step 2452, at step 2454, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby demonstration flag is off. If Yes at step 2454, at steps 2456 and 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the standby demonstration display and a command to display the standby demonstration background. The standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background are configured to be displayed in front of the first notification image and the second notification image. That is, for example, when the game is not executed for a predetermined period of time (180 seconds in this example) under the condition that the second notification image is displayed during the time-reduced game state, the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration are displayed. By displaying the background, the second notification image becomes invisible. Next, at step 2459, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S starts a standby demonstration timer MP90t {a timer relating to standby demonstration display (background) and an increment timer}. Next, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the standby demonstration flag, and proceeds to step 2470. On the other hand, if step 2454 is No, the process proceeds to step 2470 as well. If No at step 2452, at steps 2462 and 2464, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the standby demonstration display and a command to erase the display of the standby demonstration background. . Next, at step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the standby demo timer MP90t (increment timer). Next, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby demonstration flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100).

Next, at step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby demo timer MP90t has reached the mode change value (30 seconds in this example). If Yes at step 2470 , at step 2472 , the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the standby demonstration background display, and proceeds to step 2474 . It should be noted that even if No in step 2470 , the process proceeds to step 2474 . Next, at step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby demonstration timer MP90t has reached the cycle value (for example, 60 seconds). If Yes at step 2474, at step 2476 the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the standby demo background. Next, at step 2478, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the timer value of the standby demo timer MP90t (increment timer), and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100). Note that even if No in step 2474, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2100).

By configuring as described above, according to the command (information) from the main control board M side and/or the processing on the sub control board S side, the game can be played for a predetermined period (180 seconds in this example). If not, the display of the standby demo display (background) can be executed. Furthermore, when the game is not executed, the standby demonstration display is continuously displayed, while the standby demonstration background is intermittently (for 30 seconds every 30 seconds in this example). Although the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background are configured to be displayed in front of the first notification image and the second notification image, they are not limited to this, and may be configured to be displayed simultaneously in the same layer. Alternatively, only the second notification image may be displayed in front of the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background. Also, it may be configured to be able to display in a different area, such as by providing a second effect display device.

Next, FIG. 69 is an example of a standby demonstration image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, from the upper left of the same figure, under the condition that the second notification image (the characters "→ Please hit right →" at the upper end of the effect display device SG) is displayed in the time shortening game state, decorative symbols are displayed. The fluctuation of stops, and the losing pattern stops. Next, when the game is not executed for 180 seconds, the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background are displayed in the upper center of the figure, and the decoration pattern display and the second notification image become invisible. . Furthermore, when 30 seconds have passed without the execution of the game, the standby demonstration background is erased, and the display of the decoration pattern and the second notification image become visible. It should be noted that the standby demonstration display remains displayed simultaneously in front of the decorative pattern. Next, when 30 seconds have passed without the execution of the game, the standby demonstration background is again displayed in the entire area of the effect display device SG, and the decorative pattern display and the second notification image become invisible. Become. Next, when the shooting handle D44 is operated by the player, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a detection signal from the shooting handle D44, determines that the game has been executed, and displays the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background. The display is erased, and the display of the decorative pattern and the second notification image become visible.

With the configuration as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to display to the player that the game is on standby, and furthermore, the mode is changed periodically. It is possible to configure so that the current game state and the like can also be recognized. In addition, by setting the display priority of the notification image to be lower than the display priority of the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background, the display of the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background displayed when it is determined that the game is not progressing is being displayed. In other words, during the standby demonstration, the notification image is configured not to be displayed, thereby preventing the game situation from being grasped even though the game is not being played, and reducing the data volume. can also be done. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and if the configuration is such that it is relatively advantageous to the player in the time-reduced game state, the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background display are executed only during the time-reduced game state. Alternatively, the mode can be configured to be different between the time-reduced game state and the non-time-reduced game state (in the non-time-reduced game state, the standby demonstration background is displayed as part of the display, etc.). , a passive notification image, etc.). In addition, it is preferable to continue the notification such as the launch instruction display section HS and the notification of the division of the hit by the accessory. While the demonstration background is continuously displayed, the display priority of the decorative pattern and the second notification image is raised (it may be displayed on the entire surface of the standby demonstration display. Also, the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background (animation, etc.) As a routine whose execution is repeated, a period during which the game state when the game is stopped (for example, a decorative pattern or a second notification image) may be separately provided, or the game state when the game is stopped ( For example, a separate timer may be provided for displaying the decorative pattern or the second notification image, and a waiting time may be provided until the standby demonstration background and the standby demonstration display routine are redisplayed. As a configuration for detecting the operation of the firing handle D44, only information on whether or not the firing handle D44 has been operated (Yes or No) is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. It is preferable to configure so that the information (emission intensity, etc.) regarding the sorting of the operations is not transmitted, and to process (to comprehensively judge) the content of the notification regarding the sorting of the shots on the sub-control board S side. If the control board M side changes the flag related to the hitting division, the hitting division information is transmitted based on the handle touch, and if the shooting position is immediately notified, the player can be notified in advance of the big win. A situation that is detected (for example, in a game machine related to parallel lottery, the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing in the middle of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol, so that the game state changes from a time-reduced game state to a non-time When switching to the shortened game state, if the display switches from hitting right to hitting left, or if the game machine that changes the game state at the start of the change, by touching the handle first during the change Depending on the hitting information sent by , the game state transition may be inferred based on the notification of the recommended firing position).In addition, the notification image displayed when the firing handle D44 is operated is predetermined. In addition, when the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background are displayed during the time reduction game state and the notification image is redisplayed by operating the shooting handle D44, the voice is output at the same time. It should be noted that while the standby demonstration display or the standby demonstration background is being executed, the notification (particularly the warning notification), the first notification display may be executed. In addition, in the case where the notification image is displayed by operating the firing handle D44, the display of the notification image may be erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. For example, when the notification image is erased 5 seconds after the operation of the firing handle D44, even if the firing handle D44 is operated again 3 seconds after the notification image is displayed, the first firing handle D44 The notification image may be deleted five seconds after the operation of . With such a configuration, the display is not continued longer than necessary, and even when the player abruptly releases the shooting handle D44, the display is not continued longer than necessary.

(Sixth embodiment)
In the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the manner in which the player is urged to operate the gaming machine appropriately for proper progress of the game has been described in detail, but the present invention is not limited to these. In particular, with respect to the right-handed and left-handed instruction display, whether or not the instruction image being executed is correct is determined on the sub-control board S side, and if it is not appropriate, a correction display is possible. As the sixth embodiment, only the differences from the modification 1 from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) in FIG. 46 in the sixth embodiment. The difference from Modification 1 from the second embodiment is that steps 2747-1 (sixth), step 2747-2 (sixth), step 2748-1 (sixth), and step 2350 (sixth) Yes, that is, at step 2747-1 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S confirms the state of the game. Next, at step 2747-2 (6th), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the time reduction game state or the special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2747-2 (6th), go to step 2747-3. On the other hand, if No in step 2747-2 (sixth), the process proceeds to step 2250 (second variation 1). Also, in step 2747-8, step 2747-9, or step 2747-13, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the command to be displayed in the fourth notification image, and then in step 2748-1 (sixth), The CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub-control board S information about whether the various notification images instruct left-handed hitting or right-handed hitting. Next, in step 2350 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S executes a notification image confirmation process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of notification image confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (sixth) in FIG. 70 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S refers to the received firing instruction command, and confirms whether the command is for right-handed or left-handed shots. Next, in step 2353, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether the various notification images temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub-control board S instruct left-handed or right-handed. Confirm information. Next, at step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the information regarding the confirmed various notification images is information regarding left-handed hitting. In the case of Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the firing instruction command is a command related to left-handed hitting. In the case of Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the display of the first notification image, displays the second notification image and the fourth notification image in a display mode related to right-handed hitting, The process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}. On the other hand, if No at step 2354, at step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the firing instruction command is a command related to hitting to the right. In the case of Yes in step 2360, in step 2362, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the display of the first notification image, displays the second notification image and the fourth notification image in a display mode related to left-handed hitting, The process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second) process}. In addition, in step 2362, when the second notification image is configured as "non-display=instruction to hit to the left", the second notification image may be configured not to be displayed. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2356 or step 2360, the process proceeds to the next process {process of step 2750 (second)}.

By configuring as above, the information received from the main control board M side (command related to right hitting or command related to left hitting) and the information temporarily stored on the sub control board S side (instructing right hitting (Information regarding whether to hit left or information indicating whether to hit left) does not match {Information (command) related to right hitting or information (command) relating to left hitting does not match} In this case, based on the command from the main control board M side, the first notification image is erased, and the second notification image and the fourth notification image are changed from the display mode related to right-handed hitting to the display mode related to left-handed hitting, The display can be changed from the display mode related to left-handed hitting to the display mode related to right-handed hitting. In this way, it is possible to appropriately correct an erroneous shooting position, which is disadvantageous to the player, so as not to inform the player, thereby making the game machine user-friendly. In addition, the first notification image is configured to be immediately deleted when information (command) related to right-handed hitting or information (command) related to left-handed hitting does not match. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being continuously notified of incorrect information regarding the game state on the main game side. In this example, the configuration is such that immediate correction is performed based on an instruction from the main control board M side, but the present invention is not limited to this. redisplay based on a new command, etc.). In addition, it is preferable to provide a dedicated buffer for instruction display on the sub-control board S side so as to be referred to at the necessary timing when displaying the notification image. As described above, with regard to the first notification image, when the command from the main control board M side and the contents of the firing instruction do not match, the display on the sub control board S side is erased, while the second notification image and the second notification image 4 With regard to the notification image, if the command from the main control board M side and the content related to the firing instruction do not match, based on the command received from the main control board M side (based on the game state of the main control board M side ) The display on the sub-control board S side is immediately corrected and notified. When the command from the main control board M side and the contents related to the firing instruction do not match, based on the notification image for erasing the display on the sub control board S side and the command received from the main control board M side (main control board The combination with the notification image that immediately corrects the display on the sub-control board S side and notifies (based on the game state on the M side) is not limited to this example, and may be changed as appropriate. When the first notification image and the second notification image, which are notification images that are relatively conspicuous (with a large display area) from the perspective of the player, do not match the command from the main control board M side and the content of the firing instruction. Then, the notification image for erasing the display on the sub control board S side is used, and the fourth notification image, which is a notification image that is relatively inconspicuous (with a small display area) from the viewpoint of the player, is displayed by a command from the main control board M side. and the contents of the firing instruction do not match, the display on the sub-control board S side is immediately corrected based on the command received from the main control board M side (based on the game state on the main control board M side). It may be configured to be a notification image for notification. By doing so, unlike the configuration shown in FIG. 71 in which the second notification image is switched based on the firing instruction command, the display timing of the notification image in the effect that is conspicuous is controlled by the main control board. It becomes possible to shift the timing of the game state transition on the M side.

Also, the transmission of commands from the main control board M side can be configured as follows.
(1) Provide a flag related to beating that changes according to the game state (time reduction game state, probability variable game state, special game being executed, etc.), and send a command according to the flag to the sub control board S side .
(2) At the timing when the flag related to the sorting of shots may change, it is transmitted each time even if there is no actual change.
(3) The above timings are "when the power is restored", "when the losing pattern stops", "when the special game starts", "when the big winning gate starts to open", "when the big winning gate closes" and "special game at the end of", etc. (4) The flag related to the sorting is also output to an external terminal (for example, a test terminal).

(Seventh embodiment)
In the modification 1 from the second embodiment, regarding the position from which the player shoots the game ball, after confirming the entry of the game ball at the inappropriate launch position, the inappropriate ball entry is performed within a predetermined period. Although the notification image is displayed and the notification by voice is executed each time when the is continuously confirmed, the notification (warning) configuration is not limited to this. Regarding the configuration in which the notification (continuation) can be continued until the notification (warning) mode is resolved or for a predetermined period, as the seventh embodiment, the differences from the modification 1 from the second embodiment will be described below. Only detail.

First, FIG. 72 is a flow chart of right-handed image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second variant 1) of FIG. 51 in the seventh embodiment. Differences from Modification 1 from the second embodiment are steps 2167 (seventh), step 2168 (seventh), and steps 2173 (seventh) to step 2182 (seventh), that is, step 2167 In (7th), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the right-handed warning execution flag (when a predetermined number of balls are detected at the first main game start port A10 in a situation where right-handed players should hit flag) is off. If Yes in step 2167 (seventh), the process proceeds to step 2152. If No in step 2167 (seventh), the process proceeds to step 2176 (seventh). Also, in step 2164, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the counter value of the first starting entrance ball entry rate counter MP61c is equal to or greater than the notification value (two), in step 2168 (seventh), The CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, at step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sounds, and outputs the voice "Right shot!" from the right speaker D24R. Next, at step 2173 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns on the right-hand driving warning execution flag. At step 2174 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops and resets the first starting port confirmation timer MP21t, and proceeds to step 2171 . Further, if No in step 2167 (seventh), in other words, if the right-handed warning execution flag is ON, in step 2176 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the right-handed warning end condition is satisfied.

Here, the right-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of outputting the fifth notification image and sound, (2) from the main control board M side to the right side of the game board Receive passing information of sensors provided in the structure to be placed (general winning entrance ball detection command, big winning entrance ball detection command, second start entrance ball detection command, auxiliary game start entrance ball detection command, etc.) or when a game ball is detected by the effect control sensor on the right side of the board, or (3) the main control board accompanying a game state change such as the occurrence of a big hit or the occurrence of a time-reduced game state/probability variable game state When a firing instruction command relating to right-handed hitting is received from the M side, either is satisfied. If Yes at step 2176 (seventh), at step 2178 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the fifth notification image (right shot). Next, in step 2180 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops outputting the sound "Right shot!" from the right speaker D24R. Next, at step 2182 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-hand hitting warning execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-7). The following condition may be used as the condition for ending the right-handed warning.
(A) It may be the point in time when the symbol variation ends at the point when the notification by the fifth notification image (right shot) is started, or the point in time when the next variation starts.
(B) After starting the notification by the 5th notification image (right-handed), specific effects (super reach with high expectations for big hits, high expectation notice effects before reach, and pseudo continuous variation are executed during pattern fluctuations) (C) At the time of power failure recovery (D) After a specific number of pattern fluctuations (for example, after starting notification or Nth fluctuation (N is an integer) When starting or stopping.N is the total number of fluctuations in the first main game or the second main game)
In addition, although the timing as described above was used as a right-handed warning end condition for ending the right-handed warning image display (fifth notification image), along with the display of the right-handed hitting image warning, the sound, the lamp member of the game machine frame, etc. When a warning is displayed at the same time, the user may continue to call attention to the recommended firing position by voice or the like without synchronizing with the end of the image. In addition, it may be configured to notify in either case of the first main game suspension or the second main game suspension that is preferentially terminated, for example, between multiple fluctuations immediately after the game state transitions.

Next, the lower part of the figure is an example of a display image diagram of the notification image for the fifth notification image (right shot) and the fifth notification image (left shot). In the fifth notification image (right-handed), a right-pointing arrow (to which a diagonal striped texture is pasted) with the characters "right-handed" is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG. It has a form. In addition, the fifth notification image (left shot) is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG with a left-pointing arrow (to which a diagonal striped texture is pasted) to which the characters “left shot” are added. It is a mode to be done. Note that the display mode is not limited to these, and any mode may be used as long as it can clearly inform the player of the right-handed or left-handed instruction.

Next, FIG. 73 is a flow chart of left-handed image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second variant 1) of FIG. 51 in the seventh embodiment. Differences from Modification 1 from the second embodiment are steps 2267 (seventh), step 2268 (seventh), and steps 2273 (seventh) to step 2282 (seventh), that is, steps At 2267 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left-hand hitting warning execution flag is off. If Yes in step 2267 (seventh), the process proceeds to step 2252. If No in step 2267 (seventh), the process proceeds to step 2276 (seventh). Also, in step 2264, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the counter value of the general winning hole ball rate counter MP62c is equal to or greater than the notification value (two), in step 2268 (seventh), the sub The CPUSC of the control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (left-handed shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, at step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sounds, and outputs the voice "Hit left!" from the left speaker D24L. Next, at step 2273 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the left-handed warning execution flag. At step 2274 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the general winning hole confirmation timer MP22t, and proceeds to step 2271. If No in step 2267 (seventh), in other words, if the left-handed warning execution flag is ON, in step 2276 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the left-handed warning end condition is satisfied.

Here, the left-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed from the fifth notification image (left-handed) and the voice output timing, (2) from the main control board M side Detected information in the structure located on the left side of the game board (first main game start opening ball detection command, left side general winning opening detection command (when a general winning opening is provided on the left side of the game board), left side When receiving an auxiliary game start entrance ball detection command (when an auxiliary game start entrance is provided on the left side of the game board), etc., or (3) the end of the big hit game/small hit game (time shortening game after the end state, etc.), or when a firing instruction command related to left-handed hitting is received from the main control board M side, such as the end of the time-reduced game state/probability variable game state. . If Yes at step 2276 (seventh), at step 2278 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the fifth notification image (left-hand shot). Next, at step 2280 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops outputting the sound "Left-handed!" from the right speaker D24R. Next, in step 2282 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the left-hand hitting warning execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-13 process). Note that even if No in step 2276 (seventh), the process proceeds to the next process (step 2747-13).

With the configuration as described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the player continuously detects that the game ball is shot to an inappropriate shooting position in the progress of the game, the game ball is returned to the normal shooting position. It is constructed so that the display indicating the correct shooting position is continuously executed until the ball is shot or for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the fifth notification image is displayed in an inconspicuous manner (displayed in a small corner of the effect display device SG, etc.) after a relatively short period of time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of notification (display). ), it is desirable to change the aspect step by step so that it is erased after a relatively long period of time (for example, 15 to 30 seconds). The same is true for voice, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration that accompanies the notification by voice only for the first short period (2 to 3 seconds). In the case of such a configuration, when the variation time of the decorative pattern is a shortened variation (for example, 3 seconds), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, when the fifth notification image is overlapped and displayed, the display is stopped. Since the pattern becomes invisible, the fifth notification image may be forcibly erased after the first short period of time (2 to 3 seconds). In addition, as a process in the case of such a shortening variation, it is possible to configure the fifth notification image to be continuously displayed over the next variation (for example, in the variation in the number of reservations 4, the fifth notification image When it is displayed, the display is executed in advance with two fluctuations, the right-hand hitting warning execution flag is left on, and the timer that counts the termination condition is temporarily hidden from the fifth notification image. not to renew during the period, etc.).

In the seventh embodiment, as a condition for executing the notification (warning) display, the configuration is such that the notification (warning) display can be executed when the game ball is continuously detected to be shot to an inappropriate shooting position. However, the condition for executing the notification (warning) display is not limited to this. Execute a warning (notification) against the shooting of a game ball to an inappropriate shooting position at the time of transition from right to left or left to right, such as the transition of the game state or execution of a special game. Only the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail below as modification example 1 from the seventh embodiment.

First, FIG. 74 is a flow chart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in Modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are steps 1648-1 (seventh variation 1) and 1648-2 (seventh variation 1). After setting the game state information command (command to the sub-control board S side), in step 1648-1 (seventh change 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S opens the first (second) big winning hole It is determined whether or not an entry into C10 (C20) has been detected. If Yes in step 1648-1 (seventh variation 1), in step 1648-2 (seventh variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S issues a large winning hole entrance ball detection command {first (second) large A command relating to the entry of the ball into the winning opening C10 (C20), command to the sub-control board S side} is set, and the process proceeds to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, if No in step 1648-1 (seventh variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1628 (second). By configuring as described above, it is possible to transmit information (command) to the effect that a ball has been entered into the big winning hole during execution of a special game to the sub-control board S side.

Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) in FIG. 46 in modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are step 2747-3 (seventh variant 1), step 2850 (seventh variant 1), step 2748-5 (seventh variant 1), and step 2900 (seventh variant 1) That is, in step 2747-2, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the content of the firing instruction command relates to hitting to the right, in step 2747-3 (seventh variation 1), the sub-control board S The CPUSC sets a command to display the second notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2850 (seventh variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a right-handed hitting warning display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2747-7. Also, in step 2747-2, after the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the content of the firing instruction command is related to left-handed hitting, in step 2785-5 (seventh variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S , sets a command to display the second notification image (left-hand shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, at step 2900 (seventh variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a left-hand hitting warning display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2747-13.

Next, FIG. 76 is a flow chart of right-handed hitting warning display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (seventh modification 1) of FIG. 75 in modification example 1 from the seventh embodiment. First, at step 2852, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the right-hand driving warning execution flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2852, at step 2854, it is determined whether or not the right hitting monitoring flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2854, in step 2856, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the notification image break timing has been reached. Here, the notification image break timing is defined as (1) when the second notification image (left shot) is displayed during the non-time-reduced game state, (2) during the time-reduced game state, when the second notification image ( (3) During execution of the special game, the second notification image (Right shot) is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts a right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (a timer that measures the elapsed time from the notification image break timing that transitions to right-handed hitting, and is an increment timer). do. Next, at step 2860, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the right-handed monitoring flag (flag that is turned on while monitoring whether or not right-handed hitting is being performed), and the process proceeds to step 2862. Transition. On the other hand, if step 2854 is No, the process proceeds to step 2862 as well. If No in step 2856, the process proceeds to the next process (step 2747-7).

Next, at step 2862, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current game state is the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes at step 2862, at step 2864, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the general winning hole entrance ball detection command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2864, in step 2866, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, at step 2868, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-hand hitting monitoring flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-7). Further, if No in step 2864, in step 2870, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t has reached a predetermined value (30 seconds in this example). . In the case of Yes at step 2870, at step 2872, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (right shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, at step 2874, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sounds, and outputs the voice "Right shot!" from the right speaker D24R. Next, in steps 2875 and 2876, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-hand hitting monitoring flag and turns on the right-hand hitting warning execution flag. Next, at step 2878, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-7). Incidentally, even if No in step 2870, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7).

On the other hand, if No in step 2862, that is, if the special game is being executed, in step 2882, the CPUSC of the sub control board S issues a large winning hole entrance ball detection command from the main control board M side {first ( 2) It is determined whether or not a command relating to information indicating that a ball has been detected in the big winning opening C10 (C20) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2882, in step 2884, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, at step 2886, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-hand hitting monitoring flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-7). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2882, in step 2880, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the start timing of the second round in the special game has arrived. If Yes in step 2880, the process proceeds to the next process (step 2747-7). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2880, that is, when the start timing of the second round has been reached and the command for detecting the ball entering the big winning hole from the main control board M side has not been received, step 2872 to step By executing the processing of 2878, the display of the fifth notification image (right hitting) on the effect display device SG and the output to the right speaker D24R related to the right hitting instruction are executed, and the next processing (step 2747- 7).

On the other hand, if No in step 2852, that is, if the right-hand driving warning execution flag is ON, in step 2888, it is determined whether or not the right-hand driving warning end condition is satisfied. Here, the right-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of outputting the fifth notification image and sound, (2) entering the general winning entrance from the main control board M side Either the ball detection command is received, or (3) the firing instruction command for hitting to the right is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 2888, at step 2890, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the fifth notification image (right-handed shot), and at the same time, the right-handed speaker D24R outputs "Right-handed shot!" Stops audio output. Next, in step 2894, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the right-hand hitting warning execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-7). Incidentally, even if No in step 2888, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-7). Note that the display image diagram of the fifth notification image in the lower part of the same figure is the same as that of Modification 1 from the second embodiment, so the explanation is omitted here.

Next, FIG. 77 is a flow chart of the left-handed hitting warning display control process according to the subroutine of step 2900 (seventh modification 1) of FIG. 75 in modification 1 from the seventh embodiment. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the left-hand hitting warning execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2902, in step 2904, it is determined whether or not the left-handed hitting monitoring flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the notification image break timing has been reached. Here, the notification image break timing is defined as (1) when the second notification image (left shot) is displayed during the non-time-reduced game state, (2) during the time-reduced game state, when the second notification image ( (3) During execution of the special game, the second notification image (Right shot) is displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2906, in step 2908, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts a left-handed monitoring timer MP82t (a timer that measures the elapsed time from the notification image break timing for transitioning to left-handed, and is an increment timer). do. Next, in step 2910, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the left-handed monitoring flag (flag that is turned on while monitoring whether or not left-handed hitting is being performed), and the process proceeds to step 2912. Transition. On the other hand, if the result in step 2904 is No, the process proceeds to step 2912 as well. If No in step 2906, the process proceeds to the next process (step 2747-13).

Next, in step 2912, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first main game start entrance detection command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2912, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the left-handed monitoring timer MP82t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, in step 2916, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the left-handed hitting monitoring flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-13). Also, if No in step 2912, in step 2918, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the timer value of the left-handed monitoring timer MP82t has reached a predetermined value (300 seconds in this example). . In the case of Yes at step 2918, at step 2920, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (left-handed shot) on the effect display device SG. Next, at step 2922, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S uses a CH different from the BGM and other effect sounds, and outputs the voice "Hit left!" from the left speaker D24L. Next, in steps 2924 and 2926, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the left-handed hitting monitoring flag and turns on the left-handed warning execution flag. Next, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the left-handed monitoring timer MP82t, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-13 process). Incidentally, even if No in step 2918, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-13).

On the other hand, if No in step 2902, that is, if the left-handed warning execution flag is ON, in step 2929, it is determined whether or not the left-handed warning end condition is satisfied. Here, the left-handed warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of outputting the fifth notification image and sound, (2) the first start port from the main control board M side It is satisfied by either receiving an incoming ball detection command or (3) receiving a launch instruction command relating to left-handed hitting from the main control board M side. If Yes at step 2929, at step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the fifth notification image (left-hand shot). Next, in step 2932, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops outputting the sound "Left-handed!" from the left speaker D24L. Next, at step 2934, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S turns off the left-hand hitting warning execution flag, and proceeds to the next process (step 2747-13). Incidentally, even if No in step 2929, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2747-13). Note that the display image diagram of the fifth notification image in the lower part of the same figure is the same as that of Modification 1 from the second embodiment, so the explanation is omitted here.

With the configuration as described above, in the modification 1 from the seventh embodiment, regarding the position at which the player shoots the game ball, the state in which the player should hit the game ball → the state in which the game ball should be hit to the left, or the state in which the game ball should be hit to the left If it is detected that the player has not fired the game ball to the correct shooting position corresponding to the state after the transition within a predetermined period from the time of transition from the state that should be played → the state that should be hit to the right, production The active shooting instruction display and voice warning on the display device SG can be continuously executed until it can be confirmed that the game ball is shot to the correct shooting position, or until a predetermined period elapses. . It should be noted that the mode of display on the effect display device and the mode of warning by sound are not limited to these as long as they are modes that actively notify the player. Alternatively, a warning may be notified by stimulating the five senses of the player by operating a performance member provided in the game machine frame, such as vibrating the firing handle D44 or the sub-input button.

In addition, during execution of the special game, if the predetermined value related to the right-handed end condition is long enough to extend to the next round, the notification image display instruction based on the launch instruction command to start the next round is ignored. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which priority is given to the display of the notification image related to the warning (notification). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably notify the player that an appropriate shot cannot be fired in the recommended game state. On the other hand, the predetermined value related to the right-handed end condition is set to be shorter than the period for executing one round, or the configuration is such that the launch instruction command is transmitted to the sub control board S side together with the large winning opening closing command. The display of the notification image relating to the warning (notification) may be terminated along with the reception of the firing instruction command along with the closing of the mouth. By configuring in this way, when the round to be executed next to the round in which the warning display is being executed is a short opening, the firing instruction display may not be displayed. Also, at the time of the big win, there are cases where a series of effects are displayed mainly in the opening round game such as the big win start demonstration and the first round of the big win. At this time, at the start of the jackpot demonstration or at the start of each round, the sub-main board that controls the performance is transmitted to the sub-sub-board that controls the image, the display of the shooting position information and the information about the performance during the demonstration or the performance during the round. The sub-sub board that controls the image is configured to ignore (do not reset the effect) the information on the demonstration during the demonstration and the during the round if it is the same information as the information received last time. If there is no change, it will be similarly ignored. Note that even if the information received from the sub-main board is the same as the information related to the presentation, if the information related to the display of the firing position information is different, the display mode of the firing position information is changed.

(Eighth embodiment)
In the fifth embodiment, in the standby demonstration display, the standby demonstration background (which may be an animation and is displayed with priority over the entire effect display device SG) is displayed, and the standby demonstration display (right-handed instruction, variable pattern, etc.) is displayed. However, in the standby demo display, the mode of displaying information related to the progress of the game (right hitting, stay stage, etc.) to the player is limited to this. not. An example of another aspect of the standby demonstration display is taken as an eighth embodiment, and only the differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

First, FIG. 78 is a flow chart of standby demonstration display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fifth) in FIG. 67 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is step 2457 (eighth) and step 2463 (eighth). After that, at step 2457 (eighth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display a waiting demonstration informing effect, and proceeds to step 2458 . Here, the notification effect during the standby demonstration is an effect that is displayed at the same time as the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background, and is displayed in a manner different from the various notification images (for example, the character has an arrow pointing to the right). It is a production that will be done. In display control, the first notification image and the second notification image are configured to be displayed in front of (layers of) the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background. In step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the standby demonstration display. A command to erase the display is set and the process proceeds to step 2464 .

Next, FIG. 79 is an example of a standby demonstration image diagram in the eighth embodiment. First, on the left side of the figure, under the condition that the second notification image is displayed in the time-reduced game state, the variation of the decorative symbols is finished and the losing symbols are stopped. Next, when 180 seconds have elapsed without the player executing a game (such as operating the shooting handle D44), the standby demonstration display (in this example, the display of "waiting") and the standby demonstration background (in this example, Then, the night background) is displayed, and the display of the decorative pattern is not visible, but the second notification image is visible. In addition, a notification effect during the standby demonstration is displayed, suggesting that it is a situation in which a right-hand shot should be executed. Next, when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10 (by detecting the game ball entering the second main game start port B10), it is determined that the game has been executed, The display of the standby demonstration, the background of the standby demonstration, and the notification effect during the standby demonstration are erased, and the display of the decorative pattern and the second notification image are visible. It should be noted that even during the standby demonstration (a period during which the standby demonstration display, the standby demonstration background, and the standby demonstration notification effect can be displayed), it is determined whether or not to display the warning display (for example, the fifth notification image). It may be configured to display the fifth notification image when the conditions for executing and displaying the warning display are satisfied. (An image displayed during the standby demonstration such as the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background) may be displayed with priority (the display priority of the fifth notification image is higher than the standby demonstration image). . In the eighth embodiment, the display of the standby demo image is terminated when the game ball enters the second main game start port B10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device SG , the display of the standby demonstration image can be terminated at the timing at which inconvenience will occur unless the player can visually recognize the effect display by erasing the standby demonstration image. The display of the standby demonstration image may be terminated when a game ball enters the game, and when the condition for terminating the display of the standby demonstration image satisfies the condition for starting the display of the fifth notification image. Alternatively, the display of the fifth notification image may be started at the same time as the standby demonstration image is erased.

With the configuration as described above, it is possible to notify the player of the current state of the gaming machine (especially the state of right-handed or left-handed) even during execution of the standby demonstration effect. Become. In addition, when the right-handed and left-handed shots are notified by voice at the same time, the configuration may be such that the voice output is also for standby demonstration display (power saving mode, for example, the volume is reduced). In addition, unlike the situation in which a left-handed shot should be instructed, the game state at the time of starting a game at a game arcade is generally a non-probability-variable game state and a non-time-reduced game. state, the first notification image, the second notification image, or the notification effect during the standby demonstration may not be displayed during the display of the standby demonstration, so as to increase the attracting effect in the standby demonstration effect. . Note that these display controls may be performed according to display priority by providing a plurality of layers, or may be controlled by ending and/or starting display or presentation. Further, when at least the first notification image and the second notification image can be displayed as notification images, that is, when a plurality of types of notification images can be displayed, at least one notification image can be displayed on standby during the standby demo display. It may be configured to have a higher display priority than the demo screen. In addition, in a situation where the notification image regarding right-handed hitting is displayed, the standby demonstration may be configured not to be displayed. The standby demonstration may be configured not to be displayed in the displayed situation, or in a situation in which a certain notification image among a plurality of types of notification images related to right-handed hitting is displayed, the standby demonstration is not displayed, while the certain notification image is displayed. A standby demonstration may be displayed in a situation where a notification image other than an image is displayed.

(Ninth embodiment)
As described above, as the processing on the sub control board S side, the command from the main control board M side (especially whether it is a command for right-handed or left-handed), and at the sub control board S side After collating the information related to the retained notification image (whether it is a notification image related to right-handed instruction display or a left-handed instruction display), a command is sent to the effect display device SG by processing on the sub-sub side is configured to transmit the information on the game state on the main control board M side and the command on the sub-sub side so that there is no discrepancy, but it is not limited to this, and the information on the main control board M side Another aspect of the configuration for preventing discrepancies between (game state, etc.) and the command to the effect display device SG on the sub-sub side is the ninth embodiment, and the differences from the fifth embodiment Only the following will be described in detail.

First, FIG. 80 is a drawing showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is that, from the player's point of view, the upper end of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG partially overlaps, and the movable accessory YK is located on the player side of the center decoration D38. is provided.

Next, FIG. 81 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (especially on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the ninth embodiment. First, the difference from the sixth embodiment is step 2700 (ninth) and step 2950 (ninth), that is, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes special game related display control processing. After that, in step 2700 (ninth), firing position notification control processing, which will be described later, is executed. Also, in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the stay stage determination process, and then in step 2950 (ninth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S drives a movable body accessory to be described later. Execute control processing and proceed to step 2020 .

Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (ninth) in FIG. 81 in the ninth embodiment. First, at step 2749-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the contents of the symbol variation display start instruction command (command related to the current game state) received from the main control board M side. Next, at step 2749-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S temporarily stores the game state in the RAM area of the sub-control board S. Next, at step 2749-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the content of the firing instruction command received from the main control board M side. Next, at step 2749-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S, based on the contents of the symbol variation display start instruction command and the firing instruction command, sends information regarding the game state and information regarding the firing instruction as commands to the sub-sub side. to generate a notification image display command, which is one command including Next, at step 2749-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the generated notification image display command, and proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}.

Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the movable body role product drive control process according to the subroutine of step 2950 (ninth) in FIG. 81 in the ninth embodiment. First, at step 2952, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the driving start timing of the movable body role object has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts driving the movable accessory. Next, at step 2956, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines whether or not the driving end timing of the movable role object has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2956, at step 2958, the CPUSC of the sub control board S ends the driving of the movable role object, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2952 or step 2956, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2020). It should be noted that the end of driving of the movable role represented in FIG. 83 is the timing of ending the action of the movable role set as the effect, and the movable role YK in the ninth embodiment is the effect display device. This is the timing at which the advance operation is performed to a position overlapping a part of the front surface of the SG (the position where the overlapping area is large), a predetermined performance operation is performed, and the operation until returning to the initial position is completed. Depending on the type of the movable body accessory provided on the game board, an action of moving to another standby position (a position where the area overlapping the effect display device SG is smaller than during the effect execution) without returning to the initial position is performed. If it does, it is possible to set the timing of completing the operation of moving to the initial position or another standby position as the driving end timing. In addition, after a sensor or the like detects that the movable body accessory YK has moved to the initial position or another standby position, it may be set to perform an operation of moving or holding the movable body accessory YK to a more optimal position. In these cases, the position of the movable role YK can be confirmed at the time of detection by the sensor. The timing may be controlled to determine the timing when the action of the movable body accessory YK for executing another control is finished.

Next, FIG. 84 is an example of a notification image display command according to the ninth embodiment. Here, the command transmitted from the sub-main board to the sub-sub board side consists of a first command (8 bits) indicating the type of command and a second command (8 bits) indicating the processing content determined for each type. be done. Although the first command of the notification image display command is not illustrated in the figure, 8-bit fixed data indicating that it is instruction information relating to the notification image display is transmitted. On the other hand, the second command of the notification image display command is composed of 8-bit information consisting of 8 alphanumeric characters, as shown in the upper part of the figure. corresponds to the information about the game state, and the 3 bits corresponding to the alphanumeric character "B" correspond to the information about the shooting instruction. Next, as shown in the middle part of the figure, the following four pieces of information are given as an example of the information regarding the game state related to the alphanumeric character "A".
[Information on game status (A)]
1. Non-probability variable non-time reduction: information to the effect that it is a non-probability variable gaming state and a non-time reduction gaming state;2. 3. non-probability variable short time: information to the effect that it is in a non-probability variable gaming state and a time shortening gaming state; probability variation: information to the effect that it is in a probability variation gaming state;4. Demonstration in progress: Information to the effect that the standby demonstration is in progress. As shown in the lower part of the figure, the following eight pieces of information are given as an example of the information related to the alphanumeric character "B" and related to the launch instruction.
[Information on firing instructions (B)]
1. 2. Non-display (delete display): used to delete the displayed notification image; 3. First notification image (left-handed shot): an image with a large display area for left-handed shot; 4. First notification image (right hitting): an image with a large display area for right hitting; 5. Second notification image (left-handed shot): an image with a small display area for left-handed shot; 6. Second notification image (right hitting): an image with a small display area for right hitting; 7. Second notification image, Accessory avoidance notification image (right-handed): an image displayed while the movable accessory is being driven; 8. Notification image during demonstration (left-handed): an image related to left-handed that is displayed during the standby demonstration; Demonstration image (right-handed): An image related to right-handed that is displayed during the standby demonstration

By transmitting the information (A) regarding the game state and the information (B) regarding the firing instruction as the same command in this way, the time lag caused by instructing the image display with different commands, and during the time lag It is possible to prevent a situation in which the performance image regarding the game state and the image regarding the shooting instruction become inconsistent due to the change of the game state. In addition, in the number 6 of the information (B) related to the launch instruction, two images, the second notification image (right shot) and the character object avoidance notification image (right stroke), are displayed, and the second notification image is the character object. Even if part of the drive makes it difficult to see, the character object avoidance notification image (right shot) is displayed in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG that does not overlap the area where the character is driven. It is possible to visually recognize that the player should hit to the right even while the accessory is being driven. Although the second notification image is kept displayed while driving the character, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, when two notification images are displayed when the character object is driven, three notification images may be displayed by further displaying the character object avoidance notification image.

It should be noted that the mode of these notification image display commands is not limited to this example. For example, increase the number of bits related to the notification image display command (e.g., transmit 8-bit data three times, concatenate the upper 4-bit data and lower 4-bit data of the 8-bit data of 1 with the other 8-bit data of 2) and generate a 12-bit first command and a second command, respectively, or transmit 16-bit to 32-bit information at once to transmit the first command and the second command collectively, etc.) As a result, it is possible to diversify the mode of the notification image displayed by the effect display device SG and display it. You can also As an example of such additional information, the display position of the notification image can be determined by processing on the sub control board S side. For example, using a 2-bit area, display position indication information such as (1) normal position, (2) upper left, (3) upper right, (4) center, etc. can be added. positions can be set. In addition to position information, addition of information related to magnification (30%, 50%, 100%, 200%, etc.), and addition of information about another notification image (for example, the fourth notification image that is always displayed right-handed, left-handed, non- By adding information about specification of display contents for display), it is possible to change the display size and switch the display of a plurality of notification images simultaneously (or intentionally staggering the timing). Regarding the control of shifting the display timings for a plurality of images, consideration is given to the case where it is necessary to realize the content of notification that matches the appearance of the presentation and the content of notification that matches the game state on the main control board M side. is. Also, special displays may be provided for the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration, and the display mode may be changed to the special display when the number of consecutive games reaches a predetermined number or more. Also, it is possible to add information indicating whether or not there is an audio notification.

Next, FIG. 85 is an example of an image diagram of a character object avoidance notification image according to the ninth embodiment. First, from the upper left of the same figure, in the time reduction game state, the decorative symbols have started to change, and the second notification image (right shot) is displayed. Next, the movable accessory YK descends to a position overlapping the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and the second notification image becomes difficult to see, and at the same time, the lower left area of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is displayed. The object avoidance notification image is displayed at a (visible) position that does not overlap with the movable body accessory. Next, as the reach is started, the movable character YK rises to a position that does not overlap the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and when the second notification image becomes visible, the lower left character object avoidance notification image is displayed. will be deleted. Next, the "7" symbol is stopped as the symbol fluctuation stop symbol, and then the special game is started. The form of the notification image is not limited to this example, and for example, the character object avoidance notification image may have the same form as the second notification image. The timing for displaying or erasing the role object avoidance notification image is determined by counting the number of production frames or detecting by a sensor that the movable role object has returned to the initial position or reached the movable position. It may be configured to execute based on. In addition, in the situation where the role object avoidance notification image is displayed, it is possible that the movable role object stops due to an error during operation. ) (the display position in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG).

With the above configuration, in the ninth embodiment, a new command is generated based on the information on the main control board M side (game-related state) and the firing instruction command held by the sub control board S side. (announcement image display command) is generated and transmitted to the effect display device SG by processing on the sub-sub side, so that display can be performed more reliably and with diversified display positions and display modes. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the progress of the game and makes it more interesting. In addition, if an error has occurred in the movable body role and the target movable body role does not operate (error of the target role itself, error of the role that interferes with the target role at the operating position, etc.) When the sub-main board side recognizes it as management information, the sub-sub-board side controls the control of the role object avoidance notification image, and the sub-sub board side so as not to display the image effect associated with the movement of the role object. In addition, if an error occurs in this operation and normal operation cannot be executed (return operation, retry operation does not return to the initial position, etc.) may be controlled to output or re-output the character object avoidance notification image as it is in order to reliably and visually notify the position (direction) where the game ball should be shot.

Next, FIG. 86 is an image diagram showing an example of the mode of the notification image according to this example. In the same figure, an example relating to the right-handed instruction is shown, but it is of course applicable to left-handed. From the upper left of the same figure, a simple rightward arrow image, a gradation image (the gradation may be moved by animation), a dot display, and from the middle left of the same figure, a texture consisting of multiple colors is pasted on the arrow image. (The texture may be moved to the right by animation), an image with a two-color checkered arrow with letters (letters indicating right-handed hitting), from the bottom left of the figure, An image is shown in which a right-pointing arrow is attached to a character instructing a right-handed stroke, and an image in which the character has a right-pointing indication. The display mode of these instruction displays is not limited to this example, and any image (including animation) indicating that a right-handed shot is indicated can be applied to this example. In addition, as for the display mode of these images, the display position is changed according to the instruction content of left-handed or right-handed (for example, when instructing left-handed, the upper left of the effect display device SG). can intuitively understand the content of the instruction notification (whether to hit right or left). In addition, when the shooting mode is incorrect (or when the game is not executed), the notification mode is a positive notification mode (displaying a larger image, changing the color to a more conspicuous one, or increasing the lamp brightness). or increase the volume). Furthermore, in spite of executing a warning notification (notification when a game ball is shot at an incorrect shooting position), it is configured to emphasize the notification mode more when it is not followed. (Accelerate animation speed, increase lamp brightness, enlarge display area, further increase volume, etc.). Also, it is possible to make the player perceive it reliably by other vibrations (for example, by vibrating the frame role or vibrating the shooting handle D44). Also, the display mode (color, character, etc.) may be changed according to the game state (variable probability game state, etc.). Regarding the judgment of whether or not to emphasize the notification effect when performing the warning notification, the conditions for determining to execute the warning notification may be similarly used (for example, the notification execution determination After resetting the counter, it is based on whether or not the condition for the judgment value is satisfied again), or a separate judgment criterion may be provided (for example, when the emphasis stage is reached by cumulatively adding from the notification execution condition when highlighting control).

An example of the notification image with a pattern made up of two colors shown in the middle right of FIG. It is preferable to use a combination of colors that are easy to distinguish even though they are different. By using such a notification image (for example, display by an arrow or a character string), more players can clearly recognize the instruction by the notification image. In particular, it is preferable to use this aspect in warning notification (notification by the first notification image or the second notification image, and notification when the game ball is shot to the wrong shooting position). Here, the combination of easily distinguishable colors is, for example, in the case of two colors, a warm color (preferably a color with a hue of 1 to 8, more preferably a color with a hue of 3 to 5) and a cold color (preferably 13 to 19 in hue, more preferably 8 to 15 in hue. When the colors forming the notification image are a combination of at least two colors that can be easily distinguished by a player with color blindness, the notification content of the notification image can be clearly recognized. It is preferable that the at least two or more colors are applied in a manner in which the information to be notified can be identified (for example, a cold color is added to a graphic with a warm color). arrow drawn). For the sake of convenience, two colors are used, but as described above, a combination of multiple colors (gradation, etc.) may be used within an appropriate hue range, and two or more colors may be used. It is sufficient if it is considered so as to improve the distinguishability.

In addition, as another aspect of improving the identifiability of the notification image to make it recognizable, the following aspects can be mentioned. First, assuming that a combination of colors that tend to be difficult to distinguish is (Ai, Bi), the following color combinations can be mentioned.
- First combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A1, B1) = (green, red)
・Second combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A2, B2) = (blue, light orange)
・Third combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A3, B3) = (red, light orange)

When a combination of these difficult-to-distinguish colors is included in the notification image, the color of Ai can be converted to Ci (for example, yellow), which is a color other than Bi, so that it can be easily identified. . Specifically, if the player feels that the notification image is difficult to see, the operation means for effect (cross switch, effect lever, effect button, etc. sub-input button provided in the game machine) can be used at the timing of the demo screen, etc. ) can be displayed by operating ) (displaying a sample image on the setting screen and selecting Ci that becomes easier to see by the above conversion, etc.), making it possible to change to a color that is easy to see. may be configured. The setting may be applied only to notification images (especially warning notification images), or may be applied to those that change motifs such as background display and decoration frames arranged at the corners of the display screen. By doing so, it is possible to change and set the identifiability of the notification image as part of customizing the motif of the presentation, instead of changing the color. It should be noted that, based on this customization, it may be possible to change the effect mode indicating the game result executed during the symbol variation according to the setting.

It should be noted that such a notification image can also be configured to be multilingual. For example, on the menu screen, it is possible to set the notification image in multiple languages (during the standby demonstration, the fact that the display can be set in other languages is displayed in a plurality of languages that can be handled). If another language is set, replace the Japanese telop during reach or jackpot, or the display related to the recommended firing position with the corresponding language, or configure it to be written in Japanese. can do. At the same time, the system voice (for example, the voice saying "Right shot!" output at the same time as the notification image related to the right shot) may be replaced with the corresponding language. In addition, even if the language is not set (as an initial setting), an English notification image (eg, "Please launch on the right side!") may be displayed as an image for notifying the separate launch (e.g., "Right side!"). .” In addition, the sound that informs the player of the difference (for example, “Right shot!”) can be displayed at the same time when other languages are set. When the notification image to be displayed is highlighted (for example, a relatively large notification image is displayed when the instruction by the notification image is not followed), a voice notification in the set language may be output.

In addition, when the game progress that does not follow the notification image is detected, such as detecting left-handed hitting while the notification image instructing right-handing is displayed, the notification is emphasized (notified in the notification mode at the time of irregularity). When configured, for example, during the period when the design fluctuation is not reachable, during the period when the decorative pattern is not temporarily stopped (period before temporary stop), the emphasized notification is executed, and in the period While configuring so as not to execute the lottery of the planned effect to be executed, the period after the reach during the pattern fluctuation or the period after the temporary stop (as if the pattern fluctuation is executed multiple times with one pattern fluctuation During the period after the temporary stop in the pseudo-continuous variation, which is the variation of the decorative pattern that executes the temporary stop to be shown multiple times), during the period in which the effect that is important for whether or not the symbol variation will be a big hit can be performed. It may be configured so as to be able to execute a lottery for the performance. In this case, even if the conditions for executing an irregular notification mode (warning display) are satisfied during a certain fluctuation period, the notification is not started during the fluctuation period and is continuously executed. It is preferable to implement the notification at the start of the next symbol variation to be performed, and to implement the change of the effect lottery mode. In addition, even if the conditions for executing the notification mode at the time of irregularity are met, the detection of the launch at the appropriate launch position (receipt of various incoming ball signals, etc.) until the next fluctuation starts Alternatively, it is conceivable to renew the warning display execution condition to a non-established state by clocking a suitably provided timer such as transition to a demo screen.

<Other modification examples>
In this example, the jackpot start demo command transmitted at the start of the jackpot (minor win) may be configured to differ depending on the pattern of the jackpot (minor win). Hit) It can also be changed depending on the design. In this configuration, the sub-main transmits to the sub-sub a command for executing the effect even at the start of the jackpot corresponding to the received jackpot start command, but a command related to the firing position (announcement image display command). The information for selecting the type of display (part (B) shown in FIG. 84) is common among them, and the first notification image is configured so that the display mode is almost the same (the displayed object is Although they are the same, they may be provided with differences such as different positions, sizes, and timings.

In addition, it is preferable that the warning notification display (eg, the fifth notification image) is more positive (display in the large display area SG10) than the normal guidance notification (eg, the second notification image). However, in addition, when executing a warning notification display, it is also possible to replace the effect (change the lottery table and results). That is, when the importance of the notification is higher (warning notification), the effect may be set to a negative mode so that the notification to the player is prioritized.

It should be noted that, even when the ready-to-win effect develops during the time-reduced game state, information capable of identifying the pending number is displayed in a corner area (for example, , the number of reservations on the first main game side and the number of reservations on the second main game side are displayed numerically in the vicinity of the display area of the fourth notification image). Even if the second notification image (right shot) in the state must be erased due to effects etc., the display of the division of hitting (for example, the fourth notification image) and the display of the pending number are always displayed. , the player can determine whether it is a situation in which the holding should be increased or in which the shooting of the game ball should be stopped.

In addition, in the case where the premium notice (jackpot determination notification) is configured to be executable, for example, when the premium notice is executed in the normal game state (game state where left-handed hitting is recommended such as a non-time reduction game state), the second 5 Even if the requirements for warning notification (left-handed notification) related to the notification image etc. are met, it is confirmed that the game state will be recommended to hit right-handed after that, so the notification (for example, until the symbol variation related to the premium notice is stopped) may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, for example, when the big winning opening such as during the first round or during the small winning in the 7 round big win (6 rounds with balls) related to the big win symbol "9A" in the second embodiment is opened with a short opening, , when the right-handed game is not substantially advantageous, such as during the operation of the second main game starter electric accessory in a situation where the open extension function is not operating, even if left-handed is detected, the first main Since there is a benefit such as the acquisition of the jackpot lottery right associated with the entry of a ball into the game start opening, the warning notification may be configured not to be executed. In this case, in the 7-round jackpot, if a left-handed hit is detected after the second round, a warning may be issued. In addition, even if it is configured to display a warning notification by detecting a left-handed game during the time-reduced gaming state (when a right-handed game is recommended), the non-time-reduced gaming state Among them, when the second main game start opening is opened by winning the auxiliary game symbol, even if the left-handed game is detected, the warning notification may not be executed.

In addition, in this example, the launch instruction command is configured to be transmitted to the sub control board S side at various timings, but as the configuration of the launch instruction command, for example, the game state of the auxiliary game side, the auxiliary It may be configured to generate a launch instruction command using data related to a game time shortening game state (electrical support state) or an auxiliary game non-time reduction game state (non-electrical support state), or stop the losing pattern. It may be configured so that it can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side at times. Further, the content of the firing instruction command may be referred to not only at the timing of starting the display of the notification image, but also at the timing of ending the display of the notification image.

(summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are only examples, and not only the combination and separation of these listed concepts (higher-level concepts), but also the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above examples can be added to these concepts. may

The pachinko machine related to this concept (1) is
A plurality of ball entrances (e.g., first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) provided in a game area (e.g., game area D30) where game balls can enter,
A first firing intensity that allows the game ball to be shot toward the game area (for example, the game area D30) and can be released to the game area (for example, the game area D30); A game ball launching part (e.g., a launching device D42) capable of at least having a second launching intensity that is high in launching intensity and capable of ejecting a game ball into a game area, and a game area (e.g., a game area D30). is formed with a first flow-down route through which game balls shot at a first shooting intensity flow down, and a second flow-down route through which game balls shot at a second shooting intensity flow down,
Among the plurality of ball entrances (for example, first main game start A10, second main game start B10), provided on the first flow route (in other words, fired at the first launch intensity) The game ball can or is easily entered, and the game ball fired at the second firing intensity cannot or is difficult to enter) First ball entrance (for example, first main game start Mouth A10) and
Among the plurality of ball entrances (for example, first main game start A10, second main game start B10), provided on the second flow route (in other words, fired at the second launch intensity) The game ball can or is easily entered, and the game ball fired at the first firing intensity cannot or is difficult to enter) Second ball entrance (for example, second main game start Mouth B10) and
a game information display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) capable of displaying identification information in a variable and stationary manner according to the progress of the game, and capable of displaying the game information superimposed on the identification information;
It is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a ball into the second ball entrance (for example, the second main game start port B10) than the normal game state,
In the case of the specific game state, the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display a notification image, which is game information capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot at the second firing intensity, The notification image includes a first notification image that occupies a predetermined display area and a second notification image that occupies a smaller display area than the first notification image,
The first notification image is displayed in a specific game state and when a predetermined display condition is satisfied, while the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition in a specific game state. It is configured to be displayed with
During at least part of the period during which the identification information is variably displayed, the display priority order on the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is the first notification image, the second notification image, While the order of the identification information is the order, the display priority order on the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is the second during at least a part of the period during which the identification information is stopped and displayed. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured in order of a notification image, identification information, and a first notification image.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (2) is
A first start opening into which a game ball can enter (for example, a first main game start opening A10);
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) into which a game ball can enter;
a first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of variable display and static display of the first identification information;
a second identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of variable display and static display of the second identification information;
an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
A sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on the ball entering the first start port (for example, first main game start port A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A), the acquired first First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol reservation means MJ32-A) that temporarily stores random numbers and controls the occurrence of the first reservation;
When the condition for starting the variable display of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold is digested and displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g). first identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the stop identification information after the first identification information is variably displayed;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the acquired second Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) that temporarily stores random numbers and controls to cause second holding;
When the condition for starting the variable display of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the certain second hold is digested and displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g). Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) that controls to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying the second identification information;
Stop identification information stopped and displayed in the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) or stopped and displayed in the second identification information display portion (for example, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) When the stop identification information is the first stop mode or the second stop mode different from the first stop mode, special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player. and when the special game is not executed and the first identification information and the second identification information are not variably displayed, if the second hold exists, the variative display of the first identification information is started While the condition is not satisfied, the second identification information variable display start condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the first suspension exists, and the special game related to the first stop mode is executed. It is configured to be more advantageous to the player when the special game related to the second stop mode is executed than when it is executed,
When a certain first hold newly occurs, the hold information related to the first random number related to the certain first hold before satisfying the condition for starting the variable display of the first identification information related to the certain first hold can be sent to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S), and when a certain second hold newly occurs, rather than satisfying the condition for starting the variable display of the second identification information related to the certain second hold Prior to that, the suspension information related to the second random number related to the second suspension is configured to be able to be transmitted to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S),
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
The change unit is from the time the first identification information or the second identification information is variably displayed until it is stopped, and
If the first condition, including at least the existence of a predetermined number of undigested second reservations, is satisfied, during the period until the number of repetitions of the variable unit reaches the predetermined number, during the period While the second stop mode can be stop-displayed during the period, the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) can display an effect to the effect that the first stop mode is not stop-displayed during the period. and
When a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second stop mode can be stop-displayed during the period until the number of repetitions of the variable unit reaches a specific number. On the other hand, an effect indicating that the first stop mode is not stopped and displayed during the period can be displayed by the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), and the specific number is larger than the predetermined number. This pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured so that it can be increased.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A1) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and a starting port that allows a game ball to enter (for example, the first 2 main game start gate B10),
an identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entry of a ball into the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means, the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) displays the identification information variably, and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. When,
a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group;
As the game state, it is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a start hole (for example, the second main game start hole B10) than the normal game state,
Triggered by the switching of the game state, the start of the special game, or the end of the special game, the information display unit displays a notification image A capable of informing to shoot the game ball toward the second area side (for example, It can be displayed for a predetermined time on the effect display device SG),
Triggered by the switching of the game state, the start of the special game, or the end of the special game, a notification image B capable of informing to shoot the game ball toward the first area side is displayed on the information display unit (for example, When the notification image B is displayed, the notification image B is continued until the game state switches again, the special game starts, or the special game ends. It is configured to be able to display
Triggered by the switching of the game state, the start of the special game, or the end of the special game, the information display unit displays a notification image C that can notify to shoot the game ball toward the second area side (for example, When the notification image C is displayed, the notification image C is continued until the game state switches again, the special game starts, or the special game ends. It is configured to be able to display
A pachinko machine characterized in that the display area occupied by the notification image A is larger than the display area occupied by the notification image B, and the display area occupied by the notification image A is larger than the display area occupied by the notification image C. It is a game machine.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A2) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, Second main game start gate B10),
A first speaker (for example, left speaker D24L) capable of outputting sound and provided at a position closer to the first area than the second area;
A second speaker (for example, right speaker D24R) capable of outputting sound and provided at a position closer to the second area than the first area;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
As a game state, it is configured to be able to adopt a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a ball into a ball entrance (for example, the second main game start port B10) than in the normal game state.
In the case of the specific game state, the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) can display a notification image, which is game information capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area side, The notification image includes a first notification image that occupies a predetermined display area and a second notification image that occupies a smaller display area than the first notification image,
The first notification image is displayed in a specific game state and when a predetermined display condition is satisfied, while the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition in a specific game state. It is configured to be displayed with
When the second notification image is displayed, sound can be output only from the second speaker (for example, the right speaker D24R). ) and a second speaker (for example, right speaker D24R).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A3) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and a starting port that allows a game ball to enter (for example, the first 2 main game start opening B10), and a closed state and an open state in which game balls flowing down the second area side are arranged at positions where it is easier to enter than game balls flowing down the first area side. A variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) that can take a state,
an identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entry of a ball into the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means, the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) displays the identification information variably, and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20), or A special game capable of executing a special game in which a variable winning hole (for example, a first big winning hole C10 or a second big winning hole C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses. a control means;
As the game state, it is configured to be able to take a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier to enter a start hole (for example, the second main game start hole B10) than the normal game state,
During the execution of the special game, a notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As the display mode of the notification image, it has at least a first mode and a second mode that is a display mode different from the first mode,
When the notification image starts to be displayed during execution of the special game, the display mode of the notification image is displayed in the first mode, and when the notification image is displayed in the first mode, the predetermined number of The notification image is displayed in the second mode when the ball enters a variable winning hole (for example, the first big winning hole C10 or the second big winning hole C20). It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A4) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, the main game start opening (for example, , second main game start gate B10),
A variable member (e.g., second main game starter electric accessory B11d) attached to the main game starter (e.g., second main game starter B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and is open When displaced to the state, the game ball can enter the main game start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) or is easier to enter than the closed state, and when displaced to the closed state, the main game start port (For example, second main game start opening B10) Variable member (for example, second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) that is configured to make it difficult for a game ball to enter or difficult to enter compared to the open state ,
A game ball flowing down the second area side is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and an auxiliary game start opening (for example, , Auxiliary game start port H10) and
a main game identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying main game identification information;
Auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
Auxiliary game section (for example, main control board M) that supports the main game,
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
a main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the entry of a ball into a main game start port (for example, a second main game start port B10);
When the main game random number is obtained by the main game random number obtaining means, the obtained main game random number is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the main game is suspended. main game random number temporary storage means;
When the change display start condition of the main game identification information related to a certain main game suspension is satisfied, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol Main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the main game identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g);
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player and a sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for information display to be executed to the side of the sub-game part (for example, the sub-control board S);
Auxiliary game unit (for example, main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into an auxiliary game start opening (for example, an auxiliary game start opening H10);
When the auxiliary game random number is obtained by the auxiliary game random number obtaining means, the auxiliary game random number obtained is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the auxiliary identification information is satisfied, and the auxiliary game is suspended. game random number temporary storage means;
When the condition for starting the variable display of the auxiliary game identification information related to a certain auxiliary game reservation is satisfied, the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g) Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the auxiliary game identification information after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information,
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, within a displacement drive period, which is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) can be displaced, After displacing the variable member (for example, the second main game starter electric accessory B11d) from the closed state to the open state, an easy-to-enter ball game is executed in which the action of displacing the variable member to the closed state is performed one or more times. and an easy-to-enter ball game determination execution means,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
an information display content control means for controlling the information display content to be displayed by the information display unit (for example, the performance display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information reception means;
A notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As a display mode of the notification image, it has at least a first mode and a second mode that is a display mode different from the first mode,
When the notification image is displayed, it is configured to be able to determine whether the notification image is displayed in the first mode or the second mode based on the number of main game reservations or the number of auxiliary game reservations. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A5) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, General winning entrance P10) and
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
As a game state, it is configured to be able to adopt a normal game state and a specific game state in which it is easier for a ball to enter a ball entrance (for example, a general winning hole P10) than in the normal game state.
In the case of the specific game state, the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) can display a notification image, which is game information capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area side,
The notification image is configured to include an image of a figure composed of a combination of at least two or more easily distinguishable colors or an image of a character string composed of a combination of at least two or more easily distinguishable colors. It is a pachinko machine.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A6) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side, and a starting port that allows a game ball to enter (for example, the first 2 main game start gate B10),
Game balls flowing down the second area side are placed in a position where it is easier to enter than game balls flowing down the first area side, and a variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state ( For example, the first big prize mouth C10, or the second big prize mouth C20),
an identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information;
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entry of a ball into the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10);
Based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means, the identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g) displays the identification information variably, and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of balls entering the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20), or A special game capable of executing a special game in which a variable winning hole (for example, a first big winning hole C10 or a second big winning hole C20) can be put in an advantageous state for a player until a predetermined period elapses. a control means;
During the execution of the special game, a notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As the display mode of the notification image, it has at least a first mode and a second mode that is a display mode different from the first mode,
When the number of balls entering a variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) is less than the specified number, which is less than the predetermined number, during execution of a certain unit game , the display mode of the notification image when the notification image is displayed when the unit game that is the next execution time of the certain unit game is displayed is the first mode,
During the execution of a certain unit game, if the number of balls entered into the variable winning opening (for example, the first big winning opening C10 or the second big winning opening C20) is equal to or greater than the specified number, the certain unit game The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display mode of the notification image when the notification image is displayed at the time of execution of the unit game to be executed next time is the second mode.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A7) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, Second main game start gate B10),
a firing handle (for example, a firing handle D44) capable of adjusting the firing strength of the game ball;
a handle operation detection unit capable of detecting an operation to a firing handle (for example, firing handle D44);
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
A notification image, which is game information capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area, can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As states related to game progress, at least a playing state in which the game is in progress and a waiting state in which the game is not in progress,
In the waiting state, the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is configured to display predetermined information that is not displayed in the playing state,
While the notification image is not displayed when the handle operation detection unit detects the operation of the firing handle (for example, the firing handle D44) in the game state, the handle operation detection unit detects the operation of the firing handle (for example, D44) in the standby state. , a pachinko game machine characterized in that a notification image can be displayed upon detection of an operation on the firing handle D44).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A8) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, General winning entrance P10) and
An information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG),
A notification image, which is game information capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area, can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As states related to game progress, at least a playing state in which the game is in progress and a waiting state in which the game is not in progress,
In the waiting state, the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) is configured to display predetermined information that is not displayed in the playing state,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the display priority of the notification image is higher than that of the predetermined information, and that the notification image can be displayed even during the display of the predetermined information.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A9) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, Second main game start gate B10),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the game state, it is possible to generate recommended shooting information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the first area side or the second area side,
A game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated recommended firing information to the sub game section (eg, sub control board S), wherein the sub game section (eg, sub control board S)
game information receiving means for receiving recommended firing information transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
Based on the recommended shooting information received by the game information receiving means, a first notification image, which is game information capable of informing to shoot the game ball toward the first area side, and shoots the game ball toward the second area side. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that a second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to be played, can be displayed on an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG).

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A10) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, Second main game start gate B10),
A main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the game state, it is possible to generate recommended shooting information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the first area side or the second area side,
game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated recommended firing information and information about the game state to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side;
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means for receiving recommended firing information and information on the game state transmitted from the main game section (for example, the main control board M);
A first notification image which is game information capable of informing to shoot a game ball toward the first area side and a second notification image which is game information capable of informing to shoot a game ball toward the second area side; can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M) is configured to transmit the recommended firing information and the information on the game state to the sub game part (for example, the sub control board S) when the power is restored. ,
The sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S), at the time of power-off recovery, based on the recommended firing information received from the main game unit (eg, main control board M) and the information on the state of the game, the first notification The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to determine whether or not to display an image and whether or not to display a second notification image.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A11) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, Second main game start gate B10),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the game state, it is possible to generate main game recommended shooting information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the first area side or the second area side,
The main game recommended launch information includes the first main game recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the first area side, and the information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the second area side. having at least second main game recommended launch information,
game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated main game recommended firing information and information about the game state to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means for receiving main game recommended firing information and information on game status transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Sub-game recommendation, which is information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the first area side or the second area side based on the information about the game state received from the main game part (for example, the main control board M) capable of generating and storing launch information;
As the secondary game recommended launch information, the first secondary game recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the first area side, and information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the second area side. has at least the second secondary game recommended launch information,
A first notification image which is game information capable of informing to shoot a game ball toward the first area side and a second notification image which is game information capable of informing to shoot a game ball toward the second area side; can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the storage It is configured to display the first notification image based on the first secondary game recommended launch information,
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the reception is configured to display the first notification image based on the first main game recommended launch information,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the storage It is configured to display the second notification image based on the second secondary game recommended launch information,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the reception The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to display a second notification image based on the second main game recommended launch information.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A12) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, Second main game start gate B10),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the game state, it is possible to generate main game recommended shooting information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the first area side or the second area side,
The main game recommended launch information includes the first main game recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the first area side, and the information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the second area side. having at least second main game recommended launch information,
game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated main game recommended firing information and information about the game state to the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) side,
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
game information receiving means for receiving main game recommended firing information and information on game status transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Sub-game recommendation, which is information related to whether the game ball should be shot to the first area side or the second area side based on the information about the game state received from the main game part (for example, the main control board M) capable of generating and storing launch information;
As the secondary game recommended launch information, the first secondary game recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the first area side, and information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the second area side. has at least the second secondary game recommended launch information,
A first notification image which is game information capable of informing to shoot a game ball toward the first area side and a second notification image which is game information capable of informing to shoot a game ball toward the second area side; can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the storage It is configured to display the first notification image based on the first secondary game recommended launch information,
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the first It is configured to hide the notification image and the second notification image,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the storage It is configured to display the second notification image based on the second secondary game recommended launch information,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the first The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to hide the notification image and the second notification image.

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A13) is
A first ball entrance ( For example, the first main game start gate A10),
A second ball entrance ( For example, the general winning entrance P10),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First ball entrance information that is information related to entering the first ball entrance (for example, the first main game start A10), and entering the second ball entrance (for example, the general winning entrance P10) A game information transmission means for transmitting second ball entrance information, which is information about the fact that a ball has been played, and information about the state of the game to the side of the sub-game part (for example, the sub-control board S);
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving the first ball entrance information, the second ball entrance information and the information on the game state transmitted from the main game part (for example, the main control board M) side,
Recommended shooting information, which is information relating to which of the first area side or the second area side the game ball should be shot, based on the information about the state of the game received from the main game section (for example, the main control board M) is memorizable by generating
As the recommended launch information, the first recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the first area side, and the second recommended launch information, which is information related to whether the game ball should be launched to the second area side. have at least the information and
When the recommended launch information stored in the sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) is the first recommended launch information, the main game unit (eg, main control board M) receives the second entrance ball information is received and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) displays the first notification image, which is game information capable of informing to shoot the game ball toward the first area side It is configured to be displayed in
When the recommended launch information stored in the sub game unit (eg, sub control board S) is the second recommended launch information, the main game unit (eg, main control board M) receives the first entrance ball information is received and a specific condition is satisfied, the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) displays a second notification image that is game information capable of informing to shoot the game ball toward the second area side It is configured to be displayed in
When the first notification image is displayed, the first ball entrance information is received from the main game part (for example, the main control board M) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the first notification image was displayed. Alternatively, the display of the first notification image is erased by receiving information indicating that the game state has changed as information on the game state from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M). ,
When the second notification image is displayed, the second ball entrance information is received from the main game part (for example, the main control board M) when the specific time has elapsed since the second notification image was displayed. Alternatively, it is configured to erase the display of the second notification image by receiving information indicating that the game state has changed as information on the game state from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M). It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko machine related to this concept (A14) is
A game ball that flows down the second area side is placed at a position where it is easier to enter than a game ball that flows down the first area side, and a ball entrance that allows a game ball to enter (for example, Second main game start gate B10),
a main game section (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information (for example, effect display device SG);
A sub-game unit (eg, sub-control board S) that controls information display on the information display unit (eg, effect display device SG),
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
A game information transmission means for transmitting information about the state of the game to the side of the sub-game part (for example, the sub-control board S),
The sub-game part (for example, sub-control board S)
A game information receiving means for receiving information about the state of the game transmitted from the main game part (for example, the main control board M) side,
Information about the state of the game can be output to an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG),
Based on the information on the game state, recommended shooting information, which is information on whether the game ball should be shot to the first area side or the second area side, is output to the information display unit (for example, the performance display device SG). is possible and
When outputting the information regarding the game state and the recommended firing information to the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the information regarding the game state and the recommended firing information are configured to be output as one command. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

MN11ta-A First main game success/failure lottery table, MN11-B Second main game success/failure lottery means MN11ta-B Second main game success/failure lottery table, MN11-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success/failure lottery Table, MN20 Special game transition determining means MN41ta-A First main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game stop symbol determination means MN41ta-B Second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table, MN50 Variation mode determination means MN51-A First main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-A First main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-B 2 main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MP11t-C first and second Timer for main game symbol variation management, MP22t-B 2nd main game start opening electric accessory release timer MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34t Special game timer MP51c Probability variation number counter, MP52c Time reduction number counter MP61c 1st start opening ball entry rate counter , MP62c General winning hole ball rate counter MP70c Round ball number counter, MP90t Standby demo timer MP21t First start hole confirmation timer, MP22t General winning hole confirmation timer MP81t Right-handed monitoring timer, MP82t Left-handed monitoring timer MT Information transmission control means, MT10 command transmission buffer A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry detection device, A20 1st main game pattern display device A21g 1st main game pattern display unit, A21h 1st main game pattern holding display portion B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start opening B11s 2nd main game start opening ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start electric accessory B20 2nd main game Symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display section B21h Second main game symbol reservation display section,
C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device, C10 1st big winning opening C11s 1st big winning opening winning detection device, C11d 1st big winning opening Electric accessory C20 2nd big winning opening, C21s 2nd big winning opening Winning detection device C21d Second big winning opening electric accessory, C22 specific area C22s specific area entering ball detection device, C22c specific area shielding member H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start opening H11s auxiliary game start opening ball detection device, H10-1 (-2) Auxiliary game starting port H11-1 (-2) s Auxiliary game starting port ball detection device, H20 Auxiliary game design display device H21g Auxiliary game design display section, H21h Auxiliary game design reservation display section P10 General Winning opening, P11s General winning opening ball detection device S Sub control board, SM21ta Lottery table SM21t for setting change contents determination Setting change time management timer SG Effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative design display area, SG12 First reservation Display unit SG13 Second holding display unit RTC Real time clock D24 Speaker D26 Game effect lamp D44 Launch handle D38 Center decoration HS Launch instruction display unit HSL Left shot display unit HSR Right shot display unit D24L Speaker left D24R Speaker right MN52c -1 Limited frequency A counter, MN52c-2 Limited frequency B counter KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A main game start opening into which a game ball can be entered, which is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the second area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down the first area side;
A variable member attached to the main game starting port and capable of being displaced to an open state and a closed state, and when displaced to the open state, a game ball can be entered into the main game starting port or compared to the closed state. a variable member that is easy to enter and is configured to make entry of a game ball into the main game start opening impossible or more difficult than in the open state when displaced to the closed state;
an auxiliary game start opening into which a game ball can be entered, which is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down on the second area side is easier to enter than a game ball flowing down on the first area side;
a main game identification information display unit capable of displaying main game identification information;
Auxiliary game identification information display unit capable of displaying auxiliary game identification information;
a main game section that controls the progress of the game;
an auxiliary game section that supports the main game;
an information display unit capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit that controls information display on the information display unit,
The main game department
a main game random number acquisition means for acquiring a main game random number based on the entry of a ball into the main game start port;
When the main game random number is obtained by the main game random number obtaining means, the obtained main game random number is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the main game identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the main game is suspended. main game random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the display of variation of the main game identification information related to a certain main game hold are satisfied, the main game identification information is changed in the main game identification information display section according to the determination content based on the main game random number related to the main game hold. main game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the main game identification information after displaying;
special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a predetermined group; A game information transmission means for transmitting game information to the sub game section side,
The auxiliary game department
Auxiliary game random number acquisition means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number triggered by the entry of a game ball into the auxiliary game start port;
When the auxiliary game random number is obtained by the auxiliary game random number obtaining means, the auxiliary game random number obtained is temporarily stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the auxiliary identification information is satisfied, and the auxiliary game is suspended. game random number temporary storage means;
When the conditions for starting the display of variation of the auxiliary game identification information related to a certain auxiliary game hold are satisfied, the auxiliary game identification information is changed in the auxiliary game identification information display unit according to the determination content based on the auxiliary game random number related to the certain auxiliary game hold. Auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop display the auxiliary game identification information after displaying;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode belonging to a specific group, the variable member is displaced from the closed state to the open state within the displacement drive period during which the variable member can be displaced. After that, an easy-to-enter ball game determination and execution means for executing an easy-to-enter ball game that performs the action of displacing to the closed state one or more times,
The main game department
Further comprising a specific game control means for executing a specific game in which, when a predetermined special game is executed in the special game control means, an easy-to-enter ball game is likely to be executed after the special game is finished,
The sub-game department
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
information display content control means for controlling information display content to be displayed on the information display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
A notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is to be shot toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit,
As the display mode of the notification image, it has at least a first mode and a second mode that is a display mode different from the first mode,
When displaying the notification image, it is configured to be able to determine whether the notification image is to be displayed in the first mode or the second mode based on whether a predetermined condition is satisfied. cage,
As one of the predetermined conditions, when the auxiliary game unit satisfies a predetermined notification switching condition under the condition that the specific game is executed, the change information for changing the display mode of the notification image is stored, and the change is performed. Having a specific condition when it is time to change the display mode of the notification image under the circumstances where the information is stored,
If an event in which the predetermined notification switching condition is not satisfied occurs before the change timing for changing the display mode of the notification image, the notification image is generated at the change timing for changing the display mode of the notification image. A pachinko game machine characterized in that the display mode of is maintained without being changed.

Images